Manual 2005 Elantra

2005

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warrantyo New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only)o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibilityto see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM4

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A03E-AAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at anytime so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai ELANTRA models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

HXDFL280

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM3

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of whichwe're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that maybe required.

A050A05A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leavethe manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do notmeet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appearin the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2005 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai MotorCompany.

!

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM5

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safetyor durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportationand other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for animproperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For thisreason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

!

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM6

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons ifthe warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution isnot heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM7

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same partsused by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-facture vehicles. They are designed andtested for the optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered andbuilt to meet rigid manufacturing require-ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage parts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty orany other Hyundai warranty. In addition, anydamage to or failure of Genuine HyundaiParts caused by the installation or failure of

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage partis not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo onthe package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the UnitedStates are packaged with labels written onlyin English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold throughauthorized Hyundai Dealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealer call1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM8

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM9

B250A03E-AAT

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

HXDFL002-A

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM10

1. Panel Brightness Control Knob2. TCS Switch (If installed)3. Trip Computer Switch (If installed)4. Multi-Function Light Switch5. Horn and Driver's Airbag6. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch7. Digital Clock8. Audio System9. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel10.Cigarette Lighter

11.Power Outlet12.Passenger's Airbag13.Glove Box14.Hood Release Lever15.Storage compartment16.Cruise Control Switch (If installed)17.Front Ashtray18.Shift Lever19.Parking Brake20.Console Box (If installed)21.Rear Ashtray

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster noron the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto theseareas, wash them with water immediately.

!

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM11

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A01E-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-46.

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder

Indicator

ABS Service Reminder Indicator

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level

Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light

Trunk Lid /Tail Gate Open Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Cruise Indicator Light (If installed)

Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed)

Malfunction Indicator Light

Traction Control Indicator Light

(If installed)

SET Indicator Light (If installed)

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM12

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3Door .............................................................................. 1-4Theft-Alarm System ...................................................... 1-8Window ....................................................................... 1-10Seat ............................................................................. 1-11Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-17Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-23Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System ................ 1-31Instrument Cluster and Indicator ................................. 1-42Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-46Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-55Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-57Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-64Mirror ........................................................................... 1-68Hood Release ............................................................. 1-72Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-78Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-81Stereo Sound System ................................................. 1-99Audio System............................................................ 1-101Antenna ..................................................................... 1-129

1

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

B010A03A-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

B010A03E

UNLEADED

FUEL ONLY

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasolineand 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be usedin your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-ops driveability problems, the use of 100%unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcoholsother than ethanol, should not be used.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should notbe used in your Hyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (OxygenContent 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle per-formance and produce vapor lock or hardstarting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) shouldnot be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuelcan reduce vehicle performance and damagecomponents of the fuel system.

! CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problems thatare caused by the use of fuels containingmethanol or fuels containing MTBE (MethylTertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxy-gen Content 2.7% weight.).

CAUTION:o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle

shut off when refueling.o The fuel cap must be tightened at least

3 clicks, otherwise " " light may illu-minate.

!

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM2


3KEYSBREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-ommends that you use gasolines treated withdetergent additives, which help prevent depositformation in the engine. These gasolines willhelp the engine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission Control System.

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai in anothercountry, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registra-tion and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required withyour new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-ute to the economical operation and durability ofyour Hyundai by observing the following recom-mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,

or revolutions per minute) between 2,000rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoidhard braking.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don'tdrive so slowly in too high a gear that theengine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speedfrom time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutesat one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles(2,000 km) of operation.

B030A01A-AAT

For greater convenience, the same key oper-ates all the locks in your Hyundai. However,because the doors can be locked without a key,carrying a spare key is recommended in caseyou accidentally lock one key inside the car.

B030A01E

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM3


4 ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH

!

DOOR

B030B01A-AAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is stamped on the number platethat came with the keys to your Hyundai. Thiskey number plate should not be left with the keysbut kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. Thekey number should also be recorded in a placewhere it can be found in an emergency.

If you need additional keys, or if you should loseyour keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer canmake new keys if you can supply the keynumber.

B030C01Y-AAT

(If installed)

Whenever a door is opened, the ignition switchwill be illuminated for your convenience, pro-vided the ignition switch is not in the "ON"position.The light will go off approximately 10 secondsafter closing the door or when the ignition switchis turned on.

B040A01A-AAT

DOOR LOCKS

B030B01E B030C01E-1

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-

fore you drive away (especially if thereare children in the car), be sure that all thedoors are securely closed and locked sothat the doors cannot be opened fromthe inside. This helps ensure that thedoors will not be opened accidentally.Also, when combined with the properuse of seat belts, locking the doors helpskeep occupants from being ejected fromthe car in case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always look forand avoid oncoming traffic.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM4


5

B040B01A-AAT

Locking and Unlocking Front Doors Witha Key

o The door can be locked or unlocked with akey.

o Lock the door by turning the key toward thefront of the vehicle and unlock it by turning thekey toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-ing the key once toward the rear. If you wishto unlock all doors, turn the key againtoward the rear within 4 seconds.

B040C02O-AAT

Locking From the Outside(Driver's side)

The doors can be locked without a key. To lockthe doors, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.If your vehicle is equipped with central doorlocking system, the door will not lock if the keyis left in the ignition switch when the front doorsare closed. This is normal.

UNLOCK

LOCK

HXDFL2003

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the

driver's door to the "LOCK" position,only the driver's door can be locked.

o When locking the door this way, be care-ful not to lock the door with the ignitionkey left in the vehicle.

o To reduce the chances of theft, alwaysremove the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors when leavingyour vehicle unattended.

B040C01E-A

Red Mark

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM5


6

B040D01E-AAT

Locking From the Inside(Driver's side)

o To lock the door from the inside, simply closethe door and push the lock switch to the"LOCK" position. When this is done, neitherthe outside nor the inside door handles canbe used.

o The driver's door can be opened by pullingthe inside door handle even if the lock switchis depressed.


driver's door to the "LOCK" position,only the driver's door can be locked.

o When the door is locked, the red mark onthe switch is not visible.

HXD530-A

LOCKUNLOCK

B045C02O-AAT

Locking From the Outside(Passenger's side)

The doors can be locked without a key. To lockthe doors, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.If your vehicle is equipped with central doorlocking system, the door will not lock if the keyis left in the ignition switch when the front doorsare closed. This is normal.

B040C02E-R


passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-tion, all doors can be locked.

o When locking the door this way, be care-ful not to lock the door with the key leftin the vehicle.

o To reduce the chances of theft, alwaysremove the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors when leavingyour vehicle unattended.

Red Mark

Red Mark

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM6


7CENTRAL DOOR LOCK

B040E04A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door LockB040G01Y-AAT

(If installed)

The central door locking switch is located on thedriver's arm rest. It is operated by depressingthe door lock switch. If any door is open whenthe switch is depressed to the lock position, thedoor will remain locked when closed.

NOTE:o When pushing the front portion of the

driver's door lock switch, all vehicle doorswill lock.

o When pushing the rear portion of theseswitches, all vehicle doors will unlock.

B040E01E

B045D01O-AAT

Locking From the Inside(Passenger's side)

To lock the doors from the inside, simply closethe door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position. When this is done, neither the outsidenor the passenger's inside door handles can beused.


passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-tion all doors can be locked.

o When the door is locked, the red mark onthe switch is not visible.

HXD531-R

LOCKUNLOCK

Your Hyundai is equipped with left and right side"child-protector" rear door locks. When the lockmechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot beopened from the inside. Its use is recommendedwhenever there are small children in the rearseat.

To engage the child-protector feature so thatthe door cannot be opened from the inside,move the child-protector lever to the " " positionand close the door. Move the lever to the " "position when normal door operation is desired.

To open the door from the outside, pull theoutside door handle.

B040G02E

Red Mark

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM7


8 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070B03E-AAT

Armed Stage

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignitionswitch.

2) Make sure that the hood and trunk lid/ tailgate are closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of thekeyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turnsignal lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

NOTE:o If any door, the trunk lid/tail gate or hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed. If this happens, rearm the systemas described previous.

o If the "LOCK" button is pressed oncemore within 4 seconds after pushing the"LOCK" button on the transmitter, thesiren will sound once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

o Do not arm the system until all passen-gers have left the car. If the system isarmed while a passenger(s) remains inthe car, the alarm may be activated whenthe remaining passenger(s) leaves thecar.

B070C01O-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the followingoccurs while the car is parked and the systemis armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened without usingthe transmitter or the ignition key.

2) The trunk lid or tail gate is opened withoutusing the transmitter or the ignition key.

3) The hood is opened.

The siren will sound and the turn signal lights willblink continuously for about 30 seconds (Thiswill repeat 3 times). To turn off the system,unlock the door or trunk lid/tail gate using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

!

HXD200-A

UNLOCK

LOCK

PANIC

B070A01A-AAT

(If installed)

This system is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-tem is operated in three stages : the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stageand the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audible alarmwith blinking of the turn signal lights.

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described below.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM8


9

!

B070D03O-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed by using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

The driver's door is unlocked by depressingonce the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.If you wish to unlock all doors, press the "UN-LOCK" button on the transmitter again within 4seconds.

Whenever the step above is completed, the turnsignal lights will blink twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

B070E01O-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the transmitter.2. At the same time, the siren will sound and the

turn signal lights will blink for 30 seconds.3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"

button again on the transmitter.

1. Carefully separate the case with a bladescrewdriver as shown in the illustration.

B070E02HP-AAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery becomes, it maytake several pushes on the button to lock orunlock the doors, and the LED will not light.Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

HXD327

Screwdriver

B070F02O-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed)

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:

CAUTION:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal

lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmit-ter.

2. At the same time the driver's door unlocks,the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicatethat the system is disarmed.

NOTE:If you wish to unlock all doors, press the"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter againwithin 4 seconds.

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM9


10 WINDOW

B050A01A-AAT

WINDOW GLASS

To raise or lower the window, turn the windowregulator handle clockwise or counterclock-wise.

! WARNING:When opening or closing the windows,make sure your passenger's arms, handsand body are safely out of the way.

B060A02E-AAT

POWER WINDOWS (If installed)

The power windows operate when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. The main switchesare located on the driver's armrest and controlthe front and rear windows on both sides of thevehicle. The windows may be opened by de-pressing the appropriate window switch andclosed by pulling up the switch. To open thewindow on the driver's side, press the switch(1)down. The window moves as long as the switchis operated.

B050A01E2. Remove the old battery from the case and

note the polarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same(+side facingdown), then insert it in the transmitter.

Close

B060A01E

(1)

Open

B070E02A-1

Case

Battery

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM10


11

In order to prevent operation of the passengerfront and rear windows, a window lock switch isprovided on the armrest of the driver's door. Todisable the power windows, press the windowlock switch.To return to normal operation, press the windowlock switch a second time.

Auto-Down Window (Driver's Side)The Auto-Down window is moved to its fullyopen position by pushing the switch. To stop atthe desired location, the switch must be pulledup.

B060B01E

!! WARNING:

1) Be careful that someone's head, handsor body are not trapped by a closingwindow.

2) Never try to operate the main switch onthe driver's door and the individual doorwindow switch in opposing directionsat the same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot be openedor closed.

3) Do not leave children alone in the car.Always remove the ignition key for theirsafety.

B080A01A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

WARNING:Never attempt to adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving. This could result in lossof control or an accident which may causedeath, serious injury, or property damage.

SEAT

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM11


12

!B080C02A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to takeyour weight off it, then pull up on the reclinercontrol lever at the outside edge of the seat. Nowlean back until the desired seatback angle isachieved. To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.

WARNING:To minimize risk of severe injury in theevent of a collision or a sudden stop, boththe driver and passenger seatbacks shouldalways be in an upright position while thevehicle is in motion. The protection pro-vided by the seat belts and airbags in afrontal collision may be reduced signifi-cantly when the seatbacks are reclined.There is greater risk that the driver andpassenger will slide under the seat beltwhich may result in serious injury if a crashoccurs when the seatbacks are reclined.The seat belt and airbags cannot provideproper protection to an occupant if the seatback is reclined.

B080C01E

B080B02FC-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pullthe lock release lever upward. This will releasethe seat on its track so you can move it forwardor rearward to the desired position. When youfind the position you want, release the lever andslide the seat forward or rearward on its trackuntil it locks into the desired position and cannotbe moved further.

B080B01E

! WARNING:To ensure the seat is locked securely, at-tempt to move the seat forward or rearwardwithout using the lock release lever.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM12


13

B080D03A-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reduce the riskof neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, pushit down while pressing the lock knob.

Lock Knob

HXDFL114

!B080E01O-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's Seat Only) (If installed)

To adjust the lumbar support, turn the handle onthe outboard or left side of the seat. To increasethe amount of lumbar support, pull the leverforward. To decrease it, push the lever towardthe rear.

1. Minimum support2. Maximum support

WARNING:

B080E01E

1

2

o For maximum effectiveness in case of anaccident, the headrest should be ad-justed so the middle of the headrest is atthe same height as the top of theoccupant's eyes. The use of a cushionthat holds the body away from theseatback is not recommended.

o Do not operate the vehicle with the head-rests removed as severe injury to anoccupant may occur in the event of anaccident. Headrests may provide pro-tection against severe neck injuries whenproperly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest height whilethe vehicle is in motion.

B080D01JM

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM13


14

B110A03E-AAT

Folding Rear Seatbacks(If installed)

The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitatecarrying long items or to increase the luggagecapacity of the vehicle.

o To unlock the seatback, pull up the seatbacklocking knob, then fold seat toward the frontof the vehicle.

o When you return the seatback to its uprightposition, always be sure it has locked intoposition by pushing on the top of the seatback.

! WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after being folded down,be careful not to damage the seat beltwebbing or buckle. In addition, do not allowthe seat belt webbing or buckle to getcaught or pinched in the rear seat.

B110A01E

B080F01S-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat Only) (If installed)

To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the front knob forward or rear-ward. To raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion, turn the rear knob forward or rear-ward.

B080F01E

B110B01E

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM14


15

! WARNING:The purpose of the fold-down rearseatbacks is to allow you to carry largeritems than could otherwise be accommo-dated. Never allow passengers to sit on topof the folded down seat back while the caris moving as this is not a proper seatingposition and no seat belts are available foruse. This could result in serious injury ordeath in case of an accident or sudden stop.Objects carried on the folded downseatback should not extend higher than thetop of the front seats. This could allowcargo to slide forward and cause injury ordamage during sudden stops.

B080G01E-AAT

Folding Rear Seatback and SeatCushion (5 DOOR)

For convenience, the seat cushion may befolded forward and the entire seatback foldeddown.

1. Remove the headrest.2. Pull the strap of the seat cushion (A) upward

to fold up the seat cushion.3. Pull the seatback locking knob (B) on the

seatback to fold-down the seatback.

4. Then, pull forward on the seatback panel.

Warning label

B080H01E-1

B080G01E

Strap

CAUTION:After folding the rear seatback and seatcushion, store the headrests in the luggageroom so that they will not be thrown for-ward in the case of a sudden stop or anaccident.

!A

B

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM15


16

! WARNING:o Before folding the seatback, place the

rear seat belt buckles in the buckle clipson the seatback. This will prevent theseat belt buckles from becoming cov-ered by the seat cushion when it isreturned to the seating position.

o When you return the folded down seatback to its upright position, make surethe seat belts are in position to be acces-sible and to function properly.

o When returning the seat cushion to theseating position, place the seat beltbuckles on top of the cushion.

o The purpose of the fold down rear seatback and the fold forward rear seat cush-ion is to increase cargo space. Do notallow passengers to sit in the cargo areawhile the car is moving. This is not aproper seating position and no seat beltsare available for use when the seat backis folded down. Passengers who are notproperly seated and wearing seat beltscould sustain serious injuries or death incase of an accident or a sudden stop.

o Objects should not extend higher thanthe top of the front seatbacks. This couldallow cargo to slide forward and causeinjury or damage during sudden stops.

o When you return the folded down seatback to its upright position, always besure to place the rear seat belt buckles onthe seat cushion below the seatback.

o When you return the folded downseatback to its upright position, alwaysbe sure to install the headrests in theirproper positions. Headrests are impor-tant to the safety of occupants in a rearcollision. If the headrests are not in-stalled in their proper position, seriousinjury or death could result if a rear endcollision occurs.

Buckle clips

B080I01E

! WARNING:

B080H01E-AAT

Returning The Rear Seatback to anUpright Position (5 DOOR)

When you return the seatback to its uprightposition, always be sure it has locked intoposition by pulling and pushing on the top of theseatback. If the seatback is locked completely,the red color in the seatback locking knob is notvisible.

B080J01E

Red color

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM16


17REAR SEAT WARNING

B140A01S-AAT

For the safety of all passengers, luggage orother cargo should not be piled higher than thetop of the seatback. In addition, do not placeobjects on the rear shelf as they may moveforward during braking or in an accident andmay strike and injure vehicle passengers.

B140A01E

SEAT BELTS

!

!

B150A01E-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must wear theirseat belts at all times. Note that this vehicleis equipped with a Supplemental Restraint(Airbag) System as discussed beginningon page 1-31. The seat belts must be usedin conjunction with the supplementalairbag system. State laws may require thatsome or all occupants of the vehicle useseat belts. The possibility of increased in-jury or severity of injury in an accident willbe increased if this elementary safety pre-caution is not observed. In addition, followthe other instructions provided in this sec-tion.

B150B03Y-AAT

Infant or Small ChildAll 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.Information about the use of these restraintsbegins on page 1-23.

WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. In a collision, an unre-strained child can become a "missile" in-side the car. The force required to hold achild on your lap could be so great that youcould not hold the child. Any child riding inthe vehicle should always be in a properrestraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM17


18

!

B150D01S-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance of injuryin an accident. When a seat belt is used, it shouldbe placed as low and snugly as possible on thehips, not across the abdomen. For specificrecommendations, consult a physician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this is nec-essary, you should consult a physician forrecommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per BeltTwo people (including children) should neverattempt to use a single seat belt. This couldincrease the severity of injuries in case of anaccident.

B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie DownTo reduce the chance of injuries in the event ofan accident and to achieve maximum effective-ness of the restraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the front seats shouldbe in an upright position when the car is moving.A seat belt cannot provide proper protection ifthe person is lying down in the rear seat or if thefront seat is in a reclined position.

WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or lying downwhen your vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seatbelts can't do their job when you're re-clined.The shoulder belt can't do its job becauseit won't be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,you could go into it with great force, receiv-ing serious neck or other injuries.The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crash,the belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be applied there, notat your strong pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright.Then sit back in the seat and wear your seatbelt properly. See page 1-20.

place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.

B150C03A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rear seatand use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lapportion should be fastened snug on the hips andas low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out of posi-tion. Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 13) must be seated inthe front seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rearmostposition. Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER

NOTE:Small children are best protected from in-jury in an accident when properly restrainedin the rear seat by a child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Beforebuying any child restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that itmeets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213. The restraint must be appropriatefor your child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. See page 1-28.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM18


19

B160A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disassembledor modified. In addition, care should be taken toassure that seat belts and belt hardware are notdamaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be in-spected periodically for wear or damage of anykind. Parts of the system that are damagedshould be replaced as soon as possible.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback wasfolded down, be careful not to damage theseat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure thatthe webbing or buckle does not get caughtor pinched in the rear seat.

!

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If beltsbecome dirty, they can be cleaned by using amild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage and weakenthe fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assembliesshould be replaced if the vehicle has beeninvolved in an accident. This should be doneeven if no damage is visible. Additional ques-tions concerning seat belt operation should bedirected to your Hyundai Dealer.

B170A04A-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulder beltanchor to one of 4 positions for maximumcomfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too nearyour neck, you will not be getting the mosteffective protection. The shoulder portion shouldbe adjusted so that it lies across your chest andmidway over your shoulder nearest the doorand not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pullit up. To lower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.

B170A01E

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM19


20

B180A01L-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System withEmergency Locking Retractor

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion is adjustedmanually so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, thebelt will extend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock intoposition. It will also lock if you try to lean forwardtoo quickly. Check to make sure that the belt isproperly locked and that the belt is not twisted.

NOTE:If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe ignition key is in the "ON" position, theseat belt warning light will come on and thewarning chime will sound for about 6 sec-onds.

B190A01Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and RearSeat 3-Point System withCombination Locking Retractor

Combination retractor type seat belts are in-stalled in the rear seat outboard positions to helpaccommodate the installation of child restraintsystems. Although a combination retractor isalso installed in the front passenger seat posi-tion, Hyundai strongly recommends that chil-dren always be seated in the rear seat. NEVERplace any infant restraint system in the frontseat of the vehicle.

B180A01L

Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster to makesure that it has locked into position.

! WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in the locked

position when the vehicle is moving.o The misadjustment of height of the

shoulder belt could reduce the effective-ness of the seat belt in a crash.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM20


21

This type of seat belt combines the features ofboth an emergency locking retractor seat beltand an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle. When not securing a child restraint,the seat belt operates in the same way as thedriver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retrac-tor Type). It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. When the seat belt is fullyextended from the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, the seat beltoperation changes to allow the belt to retract, butnot to extend. (Automatic Locking RetractorType). See page 1-27.

NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-vides the same level of protection for seatedpassengers in either emergency or auto-matic locking modes, it is recommendedthat seated passengers use the emergencylocking feature for improved convenience.The automatic locking function is intendedto facilitate child restraint installation. Toconvert from the automatic locking featureto the emergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.

!

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system protec-

tion, seat belts must always be usedwhenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children must always be seatbelted inthe rear seats. Never allow children toride in the front passenger seat.

o The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over the shoulder nearest thedoor for the most effective protection.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door. Wearing the belt underthe arm nearest the door could causeserious or fatal injuries in an accident.

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. Atwisted belt can't do its job as well. In acollision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt webbing is straight and nottwisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belt web-bing or hardware. If the belt webbing orhardware is damaged, replace it.

!B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion as lowas possible and snugly across your hips,not on your waist. If the lap belt is locatedtoo high on your waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of a collision.Both arms should not be under or over thebelt. Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

B200A01L

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM21


22

B220A02E-AAT

SEAT BELTS - Center Rear Seat3-Point System With CombinationLocking Retractor

1. Before fastening the rear seat center belt,confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) arelatched together.

2. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched,pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab (c) into the buckle (d).

There will be an audible "click" when the tablocks in the buckle. The seat belt automaticallyadjusts to the proper length only after the lap beltis adjusted manually so that it fits snugly aroundyour hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and let you movearound. If there is a sudden stop or impact, thebelt will lock into position. It will also lock if youtry to lean forward too quickly.

B220A01E

(a)

(c)

(b) (d)

B220A02Y

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

The seat belt is released by pressing the re-lease button in the locking buckle. When it isreleased, the belt should automatically drawback into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to be sureit is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01L

B220B01E

(c)

(d)

4DOOR

5DOOR

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM22


23

! WARNING:o When using the rear seat center belt, you

must lock all metal tabs and buckles. Ifany metal tab or buckle is not locked, itwill increase the chance of injury in theevent of collision.

o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and thebuckle (b) with the following excep-tions.1) In case of folding rear seatbacks

down.2) If transporting an object on the rear

seat may cause damage to the rearseat center belt.

o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b)immediately after folding rear seatbacksup.

o To disconnect the metal tab (a) from thebuckle (b), insert a narrow-ended toolinto the groove located on the buckle(b). (4 DOOR only)

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

!

B220C01Y-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt, pressthe button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:The rear seat center belt latching mecha-nism is different from those for the out-board rear seat shoulder belts. When fas-tening the outboard rear seat shoulder beltsor the rear seat center belt, make sure theyare inserted into the correct buckles toobtain maximum protection from the seatbelt system and assure proper operation.

B230A03A-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in the rearseat and must always be properly restrained tominimize the risk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. According to acci-dent statistics provided by the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint should use oneof the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.You must use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the requirements ofthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in a crash iftheir restraints are not properly secured. Forsmall children and babies, a child seat or infantseat must be used. Before buying a particularchild restraint system, make sure it fits your carand seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all theinstructions provided by the manufacturer wheninstalling the child restraint system.

B220C01E

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM23


24

o Always make sure that the shoulder beltportion of the lap/shoulder belt is posi-tioned midway over the shoulder, neveracross the neck or behind the back.Moving the child closer toward the seatbelt buckle may help provide a goodshoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion ofthe lap/shoulder belt or the center seatlap belt must always be positioned aslow as possible on the child's hips andas snug as possible.

o If the seat belt will not properly fit thechild, Hyundai recommends the use ofan approved booster seat in the rear seatin order to raise the child's seating heightso that the seat belt will properly fit thechild. Before purchasing a booster seat,make sure that it meets applicable Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS) and that it is satisfactory foruse with this vehicle.

o Never allow a child to stand up or kneelon the seat.

o Never use an infant carrier or child safetyseat that "hooks" over a seatback; it maynot provide adequate security in an ac-cident.

! !o Never allow a child to be held in a person's

arms while they are in a moving vehicle,as this could result in serious injury tothe child in the event of an accident or asudden stop. Holding a child in a movingvehicle does not provide the child withany means of protection during an acci-dent, even if the person holding the childis wearing a seat belt.

WARNING: WARNING:! WARNING:o A child restraint system must be placed

in the rear seat. Never install a child orinfant seat on the front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur and cause thepassenger side airbag to deploy, it couldseverely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thus,only use a child restraint in the rear seatof your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint systemcan become very hot if it is left in a closedvehicle on a sunny day, even if the out-side temperature does not feel hot. Besure to check the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

o When the child restraint system is not inuse, store it in the trunk or fasten it witha safety belt so that it will not be thrownforward in the case of a sudden stop oran accident.

o Children who are too large to be in a childrestraint should still sit in the rear seatand be restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children toride in the front passenger seat.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM24


25

B230B03A-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System with the"Tether Anchorage" System

For small children and babies, the use of a childseat or infant seat is strongly recommandedand may be required in your state. This childseat or infant seat should be of appropriate sizefor the child and should be installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instructions. It isfurther recommanded that the seat be placed inthe vehicle's rear seat. Your vehicle is providedwith three child restraint hook holders for install-ing the child seat or infant seat.

B230C03A-GAT

Installing a Child Restraint System with"Tether Anchorage" System(4 Door)

Three child restraint hook holders are locatedon the rear seat package tray.

REAR SEAT PACKAGE TRAY

B230C01EFront of Vehicle

Child restraint hook holders

Tether strap hook

G230C02ETether anchorcover

Child RestraintHook Holder

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rearseat package tray.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM25


26

B230E03E-GAT

Installing a Child Restraint System with"Tether Anchorage" System (5 Door)

Three child restraint hook holders are locatedon the rear luggage compartment floor.

G230C02E-1

Tether anchorcover

Child RestraintHook Holder

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rearluggage compartment floor.

This symbol indicates the location of each userready tether anchorage.

B230E03E

2. Route the child restraint seat strap over theseatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder and tighten to securethe seat.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM26


27

B230C02E-2Front of Vehicle

Tether strap hook

REAR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTFLOOR

Child restrainthook holders

2. Route the child restraint seat strap over theseatback.

B230G03Y-AAT

Installation on Rear Seats

To install a child restraint system in the rearseats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely fromits retractor until a "click" is felt. This will engagethe seat belt retractor automatic locking feature,which allows the seat belt to retract but notextend. Install the child restraint system, buckle

the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take upany slack. Make sure that the lap portion of thebelt is tight around the child restraint system andthe shoulder portion of the belt is positioned sothat it cannot interfere with the child's head orneck. Also, double check to be sure that theretractor has engaged the Automatic Lockingfeature by trying to extend webbing out of theretractor. If the retractor is in the AutomaticLocking mode, the belt will be locked. Afterinstallation of the child restraint system, try tomove it in all directions to be sure the childrestraint system is securely installed. If youneed to tighten the belt, pull more webbingtoward the retractor. When you unbuckle theseat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor willautomatically revert back to its normal seatedpassenger Emergency Locking usage condi-tion.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint sys-

tem in any seating position, read theinstructions supplied by the child re-straint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate as de-scribed, have the system checked imme-diately by your authorized Hyundaidealer.

For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder and tighten to securethe seat.

B230G01E

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM27


28

!

B230D03E-AAT

Securing the child Restraint seat withthe "ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers make safetyseats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seats. These seats include tworigid or webbing mounted attachments thatconnect to two ISOFIX anchors at specificseating positions in your vehicle. This type ofchild seat eliminates the need to use seat beltsto attach the child seat for forward-facing childseats.ISOFIX anchors have been provided in yourvehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in theleft and right outboard rear seating positions.Their locations are shown in the illustration.

There is no ISOFIX anchor provided for thecenter rear seating position.

WARNING:o Do not install a child safety seat at the

center of the rear seat using the vehicle'sISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors areonly provided for the left and right out-board rear seating positions. Do notmisuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempt-ing to attach a child safety seat in themiddle of the rear seat position to theISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child seatISOFIX attachments may not be strongenough to secure the child restraint seatproperly in the center of the rear seat andmay break, causing serious injury ordeath.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. Theimproper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatiblechild seat only to the appropriate loca-tions shown.

o Always follow the installation and useinstructions provided by the manufac-turer of the child restraint.

B230F01E

! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint sys-tem can move when your vehicle turns orstops abruptly.

o Do not install any child restraint systemin the front passenger seat. Should anaccident occur and cause the passengerside airbag to deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Therefore, onlyuse a child restraint system in the rearseat of your vehicle.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM28


29

The ISOFIX anchors are located between theseatback and the seat cushion of the rear seatleft and right outboard seating positions.Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-tions to properly install safety seats with ISOFIXor ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX child re-straint seat, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the ISOFIX and tether anchors.Also, test the safety seat before you place thechild in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also tryto tug the seat forward. Check to see if theanchors hold the seat in place.

ISOFIX Anchor

B230D02E

ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

! WARNING:If the child restraint seat is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision greatly in-creases.

B180C01E-AAT

Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to makesure that the seat belts fit tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision is severeenough, together with the airbags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly, theseat belt retractor will lock into position. Incertain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tighter contactagainst the occupant's body.

HXG229

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM29


30

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front passenger's

pre-tensioner seat belts will be activatedin certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision issevere enough, together with theairbags.The pre-tensioners will not be activatedif the seat belts are not being worn at thetime of the collision.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heard andfine dust, which may appear to be smoke,may be visible in the passenger com-partment. These are normal operatingconditions and are not hazardous.

CAUTION:o The sensor that activates the SRS airbag

is connected with the pre-tensioner seatbelt. The SRS airbag warning light onthe instrument panel will blink for ap-proximately 6 seconds after the ignitionkey has been turned to the "ON" posi-tion, and then it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-ing properly, this warning light will illu-minate even if there is no malfunction ofthe SRS airbag system.If the SRS airbag warning light does notilluminate when the ignition key is turnedto "ON", or if it remains illuminated afterblinking for approximately 6 seconds, orif it illuminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, please have an authorizedHyundai dealer inspect the pre-tensionerseat belts and SRS airbag system assoon as possible.

!

! WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the

correct position.3. Be sure you and your passengers always

wear seat belts and wear them properly.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods. Washyour hands and face thoroughly after anaccident in which the pre-tensioner seatbelts were activated.

AIRBAG

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components. Their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

B180B01E

Driver's airbag 1

2

3

Passenger'sairbag

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM30


31

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate

only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced.All seat belts, of any type, should alwaysbe replaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several minutes afterthey have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replace thepre-tensioner seat belts yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure to heedthe warnings to not strike, modify, in-spect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadvertentactivation and serious injury.

o Always wear the seat belts when drivingor riding in a motor vehicle.

ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

B240A01E-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an advancedSupplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. Theindications of the system's presence are theletters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbagpad cover in the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel pad above theglove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installedunder the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel and the passenger's side frontpanel above the glove box. The purpose of theSRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or thefront passenger with additional protection thanthat offered by the seat belt system alone, incase of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

The SRS uses a collection of sensors to gatherinformation about the driver's and frontpassenger's seat position, the driver's and frontpassenger's seat belt usage and impact sever-ity.

The driver's and front passenger's seat trackposition sensors, which are installed on the seattrack, determine if the seats are fore or aft of areference position. Similarly, the seat belt bucklesensors determine if the driver and frontpassenger's seat belts are fastened. Thesesensors provide the ability to control the SRSdeployment based on how close the driver'sseat is to the steering wheel, how close thepassenger's seat is to the instrument panel,whether or not the seat belts are fastened, andhow severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to controlthe airbag inflation with two levels. A first stagelevel is provided for moderate-severity impacts.A second stage level is provided for moresevere impacts.

According to the impact severity, seating posi-tion and seat belt usage, the SRSCM(SRSControl Module) controls the airbag inflation.Failure to properly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an accident.

B240A01E

Driver's Airbag

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM31


32

!!

CAUTION:If the seat track position sensor is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warninglight on the instrument panel willilluminate even if there is no malfunction ofthe SRS airbag system, because the SRSairbag warning light is connected with theseat track position sensor. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate when theignition key is turned to the "ON" position,if it remains illuminated after blinking forapproximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminateswhile the vehicle is being driven, have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspect the seattrack position sensor and the advancedSRS airbag system as soon as possible.

!

WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure can

adversely affect the seat track positionsensor and cause the airbag to deploy ata different level than should be pro-vided.

o Do not place any objects underneath thefront seats which could damage the seatposition sensor or interfere with theoccupant classification system.

o Do not place any objects that may causemagnetic fields near the front seat. Thesemay cause a malfunction of the seattrack position sensor.

NOTE:o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the back-side of the sun visor and in the glove box.

o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help provideenhanced occupant protection in fron-tal crashes. Front airbags are not in-tended to deploy in light collisions inwhich protection can be provided by thepre-tensioner seat belt.

o If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is designed

to work with, and be supplemental to,the driver's and the passenger's threepoint seat belt systems and is not asubstitute for them. Therefore, your seatbelts must be worn at all times. Theairbags deploy only in certain frontalimpact conditions severe enough tocause significant injury to the vehicleoccupants.

o Sitting too close to a front airbag canresult in serious or fatal injury if the frontairbags inflate. Always sit as far backfrom airbags as possible.

o Ignoring the SRS indicator light can re-sult in serious or fatal injury if the airbags,occupant classification system or pre-tensioners do not work properly. Haveyour car checked by a dealer as soon aspossible if the SRS warning light alertsyou to a potential problem.

o The SRS is designed to deploy the frontairbags only when an impact is suffi-ciently severe and when the impact angleis less than 30° from the forward longi-tudinal axis of the vehicle. The frontairbags will not deploy in side, rear orrollover impacts. Additionally, theairbags will only deploy once. Seat beltsmust be worn at all times.

AIRBAG

Additionally, your Hyundai is equipped with anoccupant classification system in the frontpassenger's seat. The occupant classificationsystem detects the presence of a passenger inthe front passenger's seat and will turn off thefront passenger's airbag under certain condi-tions. For more detail, see "Occupant Classifi-cation System" later in this section.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:02 PM32


33

!

B240C01E

Rear impact

Side Impact

Rollover

o The driver should sit back as far aspossible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle. If you are sitting too closeto the airbag, it can cause death or seri-ous injury when it inflates.

WARNING:o Front airbags are not intended to deploy

in side-impact, rear-impact or rollovercrashes. In addition, front airbags willnot deploy in frontal crashes below thedeployment threshold.

! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or near

the airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental deployment of theairbags or by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

o Do not install a child restraint system inthe front passenger seat position. Achild restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. If older children (teen-agers and older) must ride in the frontseat, make sure they are always properlybelted and the seat is moved back as faras possible.

o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants includ-ing the driver should always wear theirseat belts whether or not an airbag isalso provided at their seating position tominimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to the airbagwhile the vehicle is in motion.

o Sitting improperly or out of position canresult in serious or fatal injury in a crash.All occupants should sit upright in theirseats with their feet on the floor until thevehicle is parked and the ignition key isremoved.

o The SRS airbag system must deploy veryrapidly to provide protection in a crash.If an occupant is out of position becauseof not wearing a seat belt, the airbag mayforcefully contact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.

! WARNING:

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM33


34

The SRSCM continually monitors all elementswhile the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontalor near-frontal impact is severe enough torequire airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seatbelt deployment.

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) onthe instrument panel will blink for about 6 sec-onds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON"position or after the engine is started, after whichthe SRI should go out.

The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box. Whenthe SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impactto the front of the vehicle, it will automaticallydeploy the front airbags.

B240B01L

B240B02L

B240B02E-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Driver's Airbag Module2. Passenger's Airbag Module3. Knee Bolster4. Pre-tensioner Seat Belt5. Front Impact Sensor6. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Belt

Buckle Sensors7. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Track

Position Sensors8. SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)9. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)10.Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)11.Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directlyinto the pad covers will separate under pres-sure from the expansion of the airbags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows full inflation ofthe airbags.

B240B01E-1

11

1

2 710

7 9

5

6

4

348

3

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM34


35

A fully inflated airbag, in combination with aproperly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or thepassenger's forward motion, reducing therisk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediatelystarts deflating, enabling the driver to maintainforward visibility, and the ability to steer oroperate other controls.

B240B03L

! WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there may be

a loud noise and fine dust will be re-leased throughout the vehicle. Theseconditions are normal and are not haz-ardous. However, the fine dust generat-ed during airbag deployment may causeskin irritation. Wash all exposed skinarea thoroughly with lukewarm waterand a mild soap after an accident inwhich the airbags were deployed.

Passenger's Airbag

B240B05L

Passenger's Airbag

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside the vehicle, do not place itnear the instrument cluster nor on the in-strument panel surface. If there is any leak-age from the air freshener onto these areas(instrument cluster, instrument panel or airventilator), it may damage these parts. If theliquid from the air freshener does leak ontothese areas, wash them with water immedi-ately.

!

B240B04E

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM35


36

!o The SRS can function only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. If theSRS SRI does not come on, or continu-ously remains on after flashing for about6 seconds when the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position, or after the engineis started, comes on while driving, theSRS is not working properly. If this oc-curs, have your vehicle immediately in-spected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or disconnecta battery terminal, turn the ignition keyto the "LOCK" position and remove theignition key. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. Failure toheed this warning will cause the SRS SRIto illuminate.

WARNING:

B990A04E-AAT

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

The Occupant Classification system is de-signed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if thepassenger's front airbag and side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not. Thesystem is designed to prevent the frontpassenger's front and side impact airbags frominflating if the passenger seat is occupied bysomeone of light weight or the seat is occupiedby a passenger who is not seated properly. Thedriver's front airbag and the driver's side impactairbag are not affected or controlled by theOccupant Classification system.

HXDFL240-A

If the front passenger seat is occupied by aperson that the system determines to be of adultsize, and they are seated properly (sitting up-right, centered on the seat cushion, with theirseat belt on and legs comfortably extended, feeton the floor, and with the seat in an uprightposition), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator will be turned off and the frontpassenger's airbag will be able to inflate, ifnecessary, in frontal crashes.

NOTE:o The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-

cator illuminates for about 6 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position or after the engine isstarted, and then turns off in a few sec-onds.

o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator illuminates, the passenger's frontairbag will not inflate in frontal crashes.If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator does not illuminate, the passenger'sfront airbag will be able to inflate, ifnecessary, in frontal crashes.

o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator illuminates, the passenger's sideimpact airbag will not inflate in sideimpact crashes. If the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator does not illuminate,the passenger's side impact airbag willbe able to inflate, if necessary, in sideimpact crashes.

NOTE:Your vehicle's Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem Control Module is equipped a record-ing device which may record the use of theseat belt restraint system by the driver andfront passenger in certain collisions.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM36


37

! ! WARNING:! CAUTION:If the Occupant Classification system is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warninglight on the instrument panel willilluminate because the passenger's frontand side impact airbags are connected withthe Occupant Classification system. If thereis a malfunction of the Occupant Classifi-cation system, the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator will not illuminate and thepassenger's front and side impact airbagswill inflate in frontal or side impact crasheseven if there is no occupant in the frontpassenger's seat. If the SRS airbag warninglight does not illuminate when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, if itremains illuminated after blinking for ap-proximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminateswhile the vehicle is being driven, have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspect the Oc-cupant Classification system and the SRSairbag system as soon as possible.

WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the Occupant Classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger's seat. A childrestraint system must never be placed inthe front seat. Children who are too largefor child restraint systems should al-ways occupy the rear seat and use theavailable lap/shoulder belts. Children areafforded the most safety in the event ofan accident when they are restrained bya proper restraint system in the rear seat.

o The Occupant Classification system canfunction only when the ignition key is inthe "ON" position. If the "PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminatedwhen the front passenger's seat is occu-pied by an adult and they are seatedproperly (sitting upright, centered onthe seat cushion, with their seat belt onand legs comfortably extended, feet onthe floor, and with the seat in an uprightposition) the Occupant Classificationsystem may not be working properly. Ifthis occurs, have your vehicle immedi-ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o If luggage or other objects are placed onthe front passenger's seat or if the tem-perature of the seat changes, the "PAS-SENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator mayblink. These conditions do not indicatea problem.

o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator blinks continuously when the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by an adultand they are seated properly (sittingupright, centered on the seat cushion,with their seat belt on and legs comfort-ably extended, feet on the floor, and withthe seat in an upright position) have thatperson sit in the rear seat. If this occurs,have the Occupant Classification sys-tem checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer as soon as possible.

o If you change the weight on the seat, the"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatormay be turned on or off for a few sec-onds, temporarily disabling or enablingthe passenger airbags.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM37


38

B990B04Y-GAT

Side Impact Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impactairbag in each front seat. The purpose of theairbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/orfront passenger with protection in a side impactin addition to that offered by the seat belt alone.The side impact airbags are designed to deployonly during certain side impact collisions, de-pending on the crash severity, angle, speed andpoint of impact. The side impact airbags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact situations.

B990B02Y

WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supplemental

to the driver's and the passenger's seatbelt systems and is not a substitute forthem. Your seat belts must be worn at alltimes while the vehicle is in motion. Theairbags deploy only in certain side im-pact conditions severe enough to causesignificant injury to the vehicle occu-pants.

!

B990B01E

Side airbagsensor

!o Do not modify or replace the front pas-

senger seat. Don't place anything on orattach anything to the front passengerseat. This can adversely affect the Occu-pant Classification system.

o Do not sit on sharp objects such as toolswhen occupying the front passengerseat. This can adversely affect the Occu-pant Classification system.

o Do not use accessory seat covers on thefront seats.

WARNING:

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM38


39

!o To receive the best protection from the

side impact airbag system and to avoidbeing injured by the deploying side im-pact airbag, both front seat occupantsshould sit in an upright position withtheir feet on the floor and the seat beltproperly fastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steering wheelat the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.The passenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.

o Do not install any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could reduce or pre-

vent the effectiveness of the system.o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.o Do not use excessive force on the side of

the seat.o Do not place any objects over the airbag

or between the airbag and yourself.o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door and thefront seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injuryif the supplemental side impact airbaginflates.

WARNING: !

B240C01JM-AAT

SRS Care

o The SRS is virtually maintenance free andthere are no parts you can safely service byyourself. The entire SRS system must beinspected by an authorized Hyundai dealer10 years after the date that the vehicle wasmanufactured.

o Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel or front seats must beperformed by a qualified Hyundai technician.Improper handling of the airbag system mayresult in serious personal injury.

NOTE:Your vehicle's Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem Control Module is equipped a record-ing device which may record the use of theseat belt restraint system by the driver andfront passenger in certain collisions.

o To prevent unexpected deployment ofthe side impact air bag that may result inpersonal injury, avoid impact to the sideimpact airbag sensor when the ignitionkey is on.

WARNING: WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured by anairbag deployment in case of an acci-dent.

o Modification to SRS components or wir-ing, including the addition of any kind ofbadges to the pad covers or modifica-tions to the body structure, can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, useonly a soft, dry cloth or one which hasbeen moistened with plain water. Sol-vents or cleaners could adversely affectthe airbag covers and proper deploy-ment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over or nearthe airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

!

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM39


40

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental firing of the airbags orby rendering the SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag system mustbe discarded, or if the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety precautionsmust be observed. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and can giveyou the necessary information. Failureto follow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of personalinjury.

o If you sell your vehicle, make certain thatthis manual is transferred to the newowner.

o If your car was flooded and has soakedcarpeting or water on the floor, youshouldn't try to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorized Hyundaidealer.

! WARNING:

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit upright, fullyback in their seats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor. If occupants are tooclose to the airbag covers, they could beinjured if the airbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on or nearthe airbag covers. Any object attached toor placed on the front or side impact airbagcovers could interfere with the proper opera-tion of the airbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modifica-tion of the front seats could interfere with theoperation of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components or side impactairbags.

o Do not place items under the front seats.Placing items under the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the supple-mental restraint system sensing compo-nents and wiring harnesses.

o Never hold an infant or child on your lap.The infant or child could be seriously injuredor killed in the event of a crash. All infants andchildren should be properly restrained inappropriate child safety seats or seat beltsin the rear seat.

B240D01JM-AAT

Additional Safety Precautionso Never let passengers ride in the cargo

area (trunk) or on top of a folded-downback seat. All occupants should sit upright,fully back in their seats with their seat beltson and their feet on the floor.

o Passengers should not move out of orchange seats while the vehicle is mov-ing. A passenger who is not wearing a seatbelt during a crash or emergency stop canbe thrown against the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out of the ve-hicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrain oneoccupant. If more than one person uses thesame seat belt, they could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve occu-pant comfort or reposition the seat belt canreduce the protection provided by the seatbelt and increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

o Passengers should not place hard orsharp objects between themselves andthe airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objectson your lap or in your mouth can result ininjuries if an airbag inflates.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM40


41

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in acrash.

o Always sit upright, fully back in the seat,with your seat belt on, and your feet onthe floor.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changing yourvehicle's frame, bumper system, front end orside sheet metal or ride height, this may affectthe operation of your vehicle's airbag system.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM41


42

9

B260A03E-AAT

(Without Trip Computer)

B260A03E-A

1 2 3 4 6 7

13 14 17

8 5

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR

5

15 16 18 19 20 21

2 10 11 12

22 23

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM42


43

1. Trunk Lid (4 door)/Tail Gate (5 door) Open Warning Light2. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)3. ABS Warning Light (If installed)4. Tachometer5. Turn Signal Indicator Light6. High Beam Indicator Light7. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (Auto T/A only)8. Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed)9. Speedometer10.Cruise Indicator Light (If installed)11.Low Fuel Warning Light12.SET Indicator Light (If installed)

13.Temperature Gauge14.Door Ajar Warning Light15.Seat Belt Warning Light16.SRS (Airbag) Warning Light17.Odometer/Trip Odometer18.Low Oil Pressure Warning Light19.Charging System Warning Light20.Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light21.Check Engine Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)22.Trip Odometer Reset Switch23.Fuel Gauge

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM43


44

10 11 12 17 19 20 211314 15 16

B260B03E-AAT

(With Trip Computer)

B260B03E-A

1 2 3 4 5 6

18

7 8 94

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM44


45

1. Check Engine Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)2. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light3. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light4. Turn Signal Indicator Light5. Cruise Indicator Light (If installed)6. Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed)7. High Beam Indicator Light8. SET Indicator Light (If installed)9. Low Fuel Warning Light10.Temperature Gauge11.Tachometer

12.ABS Warning Light (If installed)13.Charging System Warning Light14.Seat Belt Warning Light15.Trip Computer (If installed)16.Trunk Lid (4 door)/Tail Gate (5 door) Open Warning Light17.Door Ajar Warning Light18.Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light19.Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)20.Speedometer21.Fuel Gauge

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM45


46 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

!

B260B01A-AAT

SRS (Airbag) ServiceReminder Indicator (SRI)

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comeson and flashes for about 6 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" position or afterthe engine is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is notworking properly. If the SRI does not come on,or continuously remains on after flashing forabout 6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have the SRSinspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

B260P01E-GAT

ABS Service ReminderIndicator (SRI) (If installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, theAnti-Lock Brake System indicator will come onand then go off after three seconds. If the ABSSRI remains on, comes on while driving, or doesnot come on when the key is turned to the "ON"position, this indicates that there may be aproblem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Thenormal braking system will still be operational,but without the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instrumentpanel show the direction indicated by the turnsignals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,blinks more rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signalsystem is indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes on when-ever the headlights are switched to the highbeam or flash position.WARNING:

If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"or come on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D. (Electronic brake forcedistribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and haveyour vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM46


47

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warning LightB260H03A-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake FluidLevel Level Warning Light

CAUTION:If the oil pressure warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, serious enginedamage may result. The oil pressure warn-ing light comes on whenever there is insuf-ficient oil pressure. In normal operation, itshould come on when the ignition switchis turned on, then go out when the engineis started. If the oil pressure warning lightstays on while the engine is running, theremay be a serious malfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon as it issafe to do so, turn off the engine and checkthe oil level. If the oil level is low, fill theengine oil to the proper level and start theengine again. If the light stays on with theengine running, turn the engine off imme-diately. In any instance where the oil lightstays on when the engine is running, theengine should be checked by a Hyundaidealer before the car is driven again.

!

Warning Light Operation

The parking brake/brake fluid level warning lightshould come on when the parking brake isapplied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"or "START". After the engine is started, the lightshould go out when the parking brake is re-leased.If the parking brake is not applied, the warninglight should come on when the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START", then go out whenthe engine starts. If the light comes on at anyother time, you should slow the vehicle and bringit to a complete stop in a safe location off theroadway.

The brake fluid level warning light indicates thatthe brake fluid level in the brake master cylinderis low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should beadded. After adding fluid, if no other trouble isfound, the car should be immediately and care-fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.If further trouble is experienced, the vehicleshould not be driven at all but taken to a dealerby a professional towing service or some othersafe method.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonalbraking systems. This means you still havebraking on two wheels even if one of the dualsystems should fail. With only one of the dualsystems working, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required to stopthe car. Also, the car will not stop in as short adistance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you are driving,shift to a lower gear for additional engine brakingand stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

! WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car with aproblem in either the brake electrical sys-tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-ous, and could result in a serious injury ordeath.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM47


48

B260Q01E-GAT

Cruise Indicator Light (If installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-ter is illuminated when the cruise control mainswitch on the end of the barrel is pushed.The indicator light does not illuminate when thecruise control main switch is pushed a secondtime.Information on the use of cruise control beginson page 1-78.

B260J02A-AAT

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should comeon when the ignition is turned on, then go outwhen the engine is running. If the light stays onwhile the engine is running, there is a malfunc-tion in the electrical charging system. If the lightcomes on while you are driving, stop, turn off theengine and check under the hood. First, makecertain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,check the tension of the belt.Do this as shown on page 6-20 by pushing downon the center of the belt as soon as passible.Have the system checked by your Hyundaidealer.

B260K01E-AAT

Trunk Lid (4 door)/Tail Gate(5 door) Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the trunk lid/tail gateis completely closed and latched.

B260L01Y-AAT

Door Ajar Warning Lightand Chime

The door ajar warning light warns you that a dooris not completely closed and the chime warnsyou that the driver's side front door is notcompletely closed.

NOTE:To remind you not to lock the key inside thecar, the warning light comes on wheneverthe key is in the "LOCK" position and a dooris open. The warning chime only soundswhenever the key is in the "LOCK" positionand the driver's side front door is open. Thechime sounds and the light remains onuntil the key is removed from the ignition.

B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is approaching empty. When itcomes on, you should add fuel as soon aspossible. Driving with the fuel level warning lighton or with the fuel level below "E" can cause theengine to misfire and damage the catalyticconverter.

B260E02O-AAT

Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Chime

The seat belt reminder light blinks until your seatbelt is fastened when the ignition key is turnedfrom the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START" andthe warning chime will sound for 6 seconds.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM48


49INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B270A01A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND

The front disc brake pads have wear indicatorsthat should make a high-pitched squealing orscraping noise when new pads are needed. Thesound may come and go or be heard all the timewhen the vehicle is moving. It may also be heardwhen the brake pedal is pushed down firmly.Expensive rotor damage will result if the wornpads are not replaced. See your Hyundai dealerimmediately.

B260A01B-GAT

Front Fog Indicator Light(If installed)

Front fog indicator light comes on whenever thefog light switch is on.

B260N01A-AAT

Check Engine Malfunction Indi-cator Light

This light illuminates when there is a malfunctionof an exhaust gas related component, and thesystem is not functioning properly so that theexhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.This light will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and then it will goout in a few seconds. If it illuminates whiledriving, or does not illuminate when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, take your carto your nearest authorized Hyundai dealer andhave the system checked.

B260R01E-GAT

Set Indicator Light( (If installed)

The set indicator light in the instrument clusteris illuminated when the cruise control switch ispushed downward to "SET (COAST)".The set indicator light does not illuminate whenthe control switch is in the "CANCEL" position.

B265C01O-AAT

Traction ControlIndicator Lights(If installed)

The traction control indicators change opera-tion according to the ignition switch position andwhether the system is in operation or not.They will illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFFindicator stays on, take your car to your autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more informationabout the TCS.

B280A01A-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-mate fuel level in the fuel tank.

Without Trip Computer

With Trip Computer

HXDFL291

HXDFL284

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM49


50

!B290A02E-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE WARNING:

Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and cause severeburns. Wait until the engine is cool beforeremoving the radiator cap.

The needle on the engine coolant temperaturegauge should stay in the middle between "H"and "C". If it moves across the dial to "H" (Hot),pull over and stop as soon as possible and turnoff the engine. Then open the hood and, after theengine has cooled, check the coolant level andthe water pump drive belt. If you suspect coolingsystem trouble, have your cooling systemchecked by a Hyundai dealer as soon aspossible.

B300A01S-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-ters per hour (on the inner scale).

HXDFL290

HXDFL283


With Trip Computer


HXDFL030-A

HXDFL029-A

With Trip Computer

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM50


51

B330A01L-AAT

TACHOMETERThe tachometer registers the speed of yourengine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to such aspeed that the needle enters the red zoneon the tachometer face. This can causesevere engine damage and may void yourwarranty.

!

B310B04E-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

OdometerRecords the total distance the vehicle has beendriven.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent to changethe mileage registered on the odometer.The alteration of the odometer may voidyour warranty coverage.


HXDFL330

HXDFL331

With Trip Computer


HXDFL231-A

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM51


52

HXDFL077-1

Function of Digital Odometer/Trip Odometer

Pushing in the reset switch under the right sideof the speedometer when the ignition switch isturned "ON" will display the following sequence:

1. OdometerThe odometer records the total driving distancein miles or kilometers.

2,3. Trip odometerRecords the distance of 2 trips in miles orkilometers.

TRIP A : First distance you have traveled fromyour origination point to a first destina-tion.

TRIP B : Second distance from the first desti-nation to the final destination.

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the resetswitch. When pressed for 1 second, it will resetto 0.

B310A01S-AAT

ODOMETER

The odometer records the total driving distancein miles or kilometers, and is useful for keepinga record for maintenance intervals.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent to changethe number of the odometer.The alteration of the odometer may voidyour warranty coverage.

With Trip Computer

HXDFL078-AReset switch

HXDFL230-A

Odometer

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM52


53

B400B03E-AAT

(If installed)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-con-trolled driver information gauge that displaysinformation related to driving, such as estimatedtripmeter, average fuel consumption and dis-tance to empty on the LCD.

1. Tripmeter

o This mode provides the total distance trav-elled since the last tripmeter reset. Totaldistance is also reset to zero if the battery isdisconnected.

o Pressing the trip computer switch for morethan 1 second, when the tripmeter is beingdisplayed, clears the tripmeter to zero.

o The meter's working range is from 0 to 999.9miles.

HXDFL371-1

Tripmeter

TRIPMETER

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

DISTANCE TO EMPTY HXDFL230A-AOdometer

Trip Computer Switch

o The trip computer switch is used to zero themulti-functional display mode.

o Pushing in the trip computer switch behindthe left side of the steering wheel changesthe display as follows;

TRIP COMPUTER

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM53


54

2. Average Fuel Consumption 3. Distance to Empty

NOTE:o The distance to empty can differ from

the actual tripmeter according to drivingcondition habits.

o The distance to empty can vary accord-ing to the driving conditions, drivingpattern or vehicle speed.

Distance to empty

Distance to empty symbol

HXDFL230B-AOdometer

OdometerHXDFL1026-A

Distance to empty FLASHINGDistance to empty symbol

Average fuel consumption

HXDFL230C-A

o This mode calculates the average fuel con-sumption from the total fuel used and thedistance since the last average consump-tion reset.

o The total fuel used is calculated from the fuelconsumption input.

o For an accurate calculation, drive more than0.5 mile.

o The meter's working range is from 0.0 to 99.9miles/gallon(MPG).

o This mode provides the estimated distanceto empty from the current fuel level in the fueltank and distance to empty symbol.

o When refueling with more than 2 gallons, thetrip computer will recognize refueling hasoccurred.

o For an accurate distance to empty, drivemore than 0.5 mile.

o When the distance to empty is less than30 miles, the symbol will always come on andthe distance to empty digits will indicate"----" with flash until the fuel is added.

Odometer

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM54


55

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushingupwards on the lever causes the turn signals onthe right side of the car to blink. As the turn iscompleted, the lever will automatically return tothe center position and turn off the turn signalsat the same time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all, there isa malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up ordown to a point where it begins flashing.The lever will automatically return to the centerposition when released.

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

HXDFL352

B340C03E-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on theend of the multi-function switch. The first posi-tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, taillights and instrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

HXDFL360

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM55


56

Parking Light Auto Off

If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" keyout, the parking lights will automatically shut"OFF" when the driver's door is opened.To turn them "ON" again you must simply turnthe ignition key to the "ON" position.

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, push thelever forward (away from you). The high beamindicator light will come on at the same time. Forlow beams, pull the lever back toward you.

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switch levertoward you, then release it. The headlights canbe flashed even though the headlight switch isin the "OFF" position.

B340G01LZ-AAT

Auto Light (If installed)

HXDFL361

To operate the automatic light feature, turn thebarrel on the end of the multi-function switch. Ifyou set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", thetail lights and headlights will be turned automati-cally on or off according to external illuminationconditions.

NOTE:Turn on the lights manually in foggy, cloudyand rainy conditions.

HXDFL351

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM56


57

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has three posi-tions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system, donot attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snowand ice should be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow or ice,operate the heater in the defrost mode tomelt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

B350C01S-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent WiperOperation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place thewiper switch in the "INT" position. With theswitch in this position, the interval betweenwipes can be varied from 2 to 10 seconds byturning the interval adjuster barrel.

B360B01L-AAT

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH(If installed)

To turn on the front fog lights, place the switchin the "ON" position. They will come on when theheadlight switch is in the second position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams, thefront fog lights will be turned off.

HXDFL359

HXDFL353-A

HXDFL354-A

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH

1

2

3

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM57


58

B350B01A-AAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel. Whenthe washer lever is operated, the wipers auto-matically make two passes across the wind-shield. The washer continues to operate untilthe lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than 15

seconds at a time or when the fluid reser-voir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to the glassprior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.

HXDFL355-A

B390A01E-AAT

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER(If installed)

1. : The rear window wiper starts to oper-ate three times after the washer fluidsprays onto the rear window.

2.OFF3.INT : The interval between wipes operates

every 5 seconds intermittently.4.ON : The rear window wiper starts to oper-

ate continuously.5. : The washer fluid will be sprayed onto

the rear window and the wiper oper-ates while the rear window wiper bar-rel is placed in this position.

HXDFL357-A

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired to clear mist, push thewindshield wiper and washer control lever up-wards.

HXDFL356-A

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM58


59

B380A01E-AAT

The rear window defroster and heated outsiderearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in theswitch. To turn the defroster off, push the switcha second time. The rear window defrosterautomatically turns itself off after about 20 min-utes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in theswitch again after it has turned itself off.

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type of glasscleaner or use a scraper to remove foreigndeposits from the inner surface of the glassas this may cause damage to the defrosterelements.

!

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionfor the rear window defroster to operate.

Do not operate the washer continuously formore than 15 seconds or when the fluid reser-voir is empty; this could damage the system. Donot operate the wiper when the window is dry;this can result in scratching as well as prema-ture wiper blade wear.For the reason stated above,do not operate thewasher when the washer fluid reservoir isempty.

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH

B380B01E-A

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM59


60

B410A01A-AAT

B410A01E-A

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

The instrument panel lights can be made brighteror dimmer by turning the instrument panel lightcontrol knob.

DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01A-AAT

There are three control buttons for the digitalclock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" tofacilitate resetting the clock to the correct time.When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29changes the readout to 12 : 00.

HXDFL400

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should be usedwhenever you find it necessary to stop the carin a hazardous location. When you must makesuch an emergency stop, always pull off theroad as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causes allturn signal lights to blink. The hazard warninglights will operate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, push theswitch a second time.

HXDFL371

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM60


61CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A01A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key mustbe in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the wayinto its socket. When the element has heated,the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. Thiscan damage the heating element and create afire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or itsapproved equivalent.

HXDFL420

!B500D08O-AAT

These supply 12V electric power to operateelectric accessories or equipment only whenthe key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

CAUTION:o Use the power outlet only when the

engine is running and remove the plugfrom the power outlet after using theelectric device. Using the power outletwhen the engine stops or keeping theelectric device with plugged in for manyhours may cause the battery to dis-charge.

o Do not use the power outlet to connectelectric accessories or equipment thatare not designed to operate on 12 volts.

o Some electronic devices can cause elec-tronic interference when plugged intothe power outlet. These devices maycause excessive audio noise and mal-functions in other electronic systems ordevices in your vehicle.

HXDFL421

POWER OUTLET

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM61


62

B530A01A-AAT

Always engage the parking brake before leav-ing the vehicle. This also turns on the parkingbrake indicator light when the key is in the "ON"or "START" position. Before driving away, besure that the parking brake is fully released andthe indicator light is off.

o To engage the parking brake, pull the leverup as far as possible.

o To release the parking brake, pull up thelever and press the thumb button. Then,while holding the button in, lower the brakelever.

PARKING BRAKE

B530A01E

B440A01E-AAT

Rear Ashtray

The rear ashtray may be opened by pulling thelid out by its top edge. To remove the ashtray toempty or clean it, press down on the spring-loaded tab inside the ashtray and lift the ashtrayupward and pull it all the way out.

B430A01E

Spring-loaded tab

B430A01B-AAT

Front Ashtray

The front ashtray may be opened by pushingand releasing the ashtray lid. To remove theashtray to empty or clean it, lift the metal ashreceptacle upward and pull it out. The ashtraylight will only illuminate when the external lightsare on(If installed).

ASHTRAY

HXDFL440

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM62


63

!

!

B450B02E-AAT

Rear Drink Holder (If installed)The rear drink holder for holding cups is locatedin the rear seat center (center of the rear seatarm rest- 5 door). The drink holder can be usedby pushing it in first and then releasing it.

HXDOM302

HXDFL1033

4DOOR

5DOOR

CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its stored positionwhile not in use.

DRINK HOLDER

B450A02E-AAT

Front Drink Holder

The front drink holder for holding cups is locatedon the right side of the parking brake.

HXDOM120WARNING:

o Use caution when using the drink hold-ers. A spilled hot beverage that is veryhot can injure you or your passengers.Spilled liquids can damage interior trimand electrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cups orcans on the drink holder. These objectscan be thrown out in the event of asudden stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in the vehicle.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM63


64

!

B470A02S-AAT

SUNSHADE

The sunshade can be opened and closed bysliding it forward or rearward when the sunroofis closed. The sunshade will be opened auto-matically when the sunroof is opened, but it mustbe closed manually.

B470A01E

SUNROOF

B460A01S-AAT

(If installed)

The sunroof can be operated with the ignitionkey in the "ON" position.

B460B03E-AAT

OPERATING THE SUNROOFOpening or Closing the Sunroof

B460B02E-A

The sunroof can be electrically opened or closedwith the ignition key in the "ON" position. Thesunroof is moved to its fully open position bypushing and holding the "OPEN" button. Re-lease the button when the sunroof reaches thedesired position. To close, press and hold the"CLOSE" button.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driving.

B540B01E-GAT

(If installed)

The seatback pockets for holding papers arelocated on the backside of the front seats.

SEATBACK POCKET

HXDFL536-A

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM64


65

B460C02S-AAT

Tilting the SunroofB460D03E-AAT

Manual Operation of SunroofIf the sunroof does not operate electrically:

The sunroof can be tilted by pushing the "UP"button with the sunroof closed. Release thebutton when the sunroof reaches the desiredposition. To close the sunroof, press the"DOWN" button.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there israin, be sure to wipe off any water that ison the sunroof before operating it.

1. Remove the rectangular plastic interior lightlenses in the front overhead console byusing a flat blade screwdriver.

2. Remove the front overhead console with a

B460C02E-A

B460D02E-A

!

!

WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,

arms or body are between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash, as this couldresult in an injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out of thesunroof opening at any time.

o Do not press any sunroof control buttonlonger than necessary.Damage to the motor or system compo-nents could occur.

CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold

temperatures or when it is covered withice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM65


66 INTERIOR LIGHT

B480A01E-AAT

FRONT INTERIOR LIGHTMap Light

The two map light buttons are located on bothsides of the front overhead console. Push in themap light button to turn the light on or off. Thislight produces a spot beam for convenient useas a map light at night or as a personal light forthe driver and the passenger.

B460F02E-A

B480A02E-A

Without SunroofWith Sunroof

with the vehicle into the socket. This wrenchcan be found in the vehicle's trunk or glovebox.

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or coun-terclockwise to close.

flat blade screwdriver.3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided

B460E02E-A

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:03 PM66


67SPECTACLE CASE

!

B491A03O-GAT

(If Installed)

The spectacle case is located on the frontoverhead console.Push the end of the cover to open the spectaclecase.

WARNING:Do not keep objects except spectacles in-side the spectacle case. Such objects canbe thrown from the case in the event of asudden stop or an accident, possibly injur-ing the passengers in the vehicle.

HXDOM241

o ONIn the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes.

B490A03E-AAT

Interior light

The interior courtesy light switch has threepositions. The three positions are:

o DRIn the "DR" position, the interior courtesy lightcomes on when any door is opened regardlessof the ignition key position. The light goes outwhen the door is closed.

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with the delay-out interior light, the light goes out gradu-ally within 6 seconds after the door is closed.

B490B01E

CAUTION:Do not leave the switch in this position foran extended period time when the vehicleis not running.

o OFFIn the "OFF" position, the light stays off at alltimes even though a door is open.

!

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM67


68 MIRROR

B510A01S-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORManual Type

The outside rearview mirror on the driver's sideis equipped with a remote control for yourconvenience. It is operated by the control leverin the bottom front corner of the window.Before driving away, always check that yourmirrors are positioned so you can see behindyou, both to the left and right sides, as well asdirectly behind your vehicle. When using themirror, always exercise caution when attempt-ing to judge the distance of vehicles behind oralong side of you.

B510A01E

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

B500B02E-GAT

The storage compartment may be opened bypulling it out by its grip.It is used for storing small articles.If the storage compartment is removed, the fusebox for the lights and other electrical accesso-ries will be exposed.

HXD301

GLOVE BOX

B500A01A-AAT

! WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the glove boxdoor should be kept closed when the car isin motion.

B500A01E-A

To open the glove box, pull on the glove boxrelease lever.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM68


69

!

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continuously

for an unnecessary length of time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face could

cause permanent damage. To removeany ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved de-icer.

!

WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passengerside rear view mirror. It is a convex mirrorwith a curved surface, and objects seen inthis mirror are closer than they appear.

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjustedto your preferred rear vision, both directly be-hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left andright sides.The remote control outside rearview mirrorswitch controls the adjustments for both rightand left outside mirrors.

To adjust the position of either mirror:1. Move the selecting switch to the right or left

to activate the adjustable mechanism for thecorresponding door mirror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appro-priate directional switch as illustrated.

B510D01E

NOTE:If the mirror control is jammed with ice, donot attempt to break it free using the controlhandle or by manipulating the face of themirror. Use an approved spray de-icer (notradiator antifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.

B510B01Y-AAT

Electric Type (If installed)

B510C01E

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM69


70

B520A01A-AAT

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEWMIRRORManual type

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night insiderearview mirror. The "night" position is selectedby flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you. In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is reduced.

HXDFL2112

!

B510C01A-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEWMIRRORS

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push themtowards the rear.The outside rearview mirrors can be foldedrearward for parking in narrow areas.

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearviewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and an acci-dent which could cause serious injury ordeath.

B510E01E

B510D01E-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER(If installed)

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuatedin connection with the rear window defroster. Toheat the outside rearview mirror glass, pushin the switch for the rear window defroster. Therearview mirror glass will be heated for defrost-ing or defogging and will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather conditions. Push theswitch again to turn the heater off. The outsiderearview mirror heater automatically turns itselfoff after 20 minutes.

B380A01GK

Manual

Automatic

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM70


71SUN VISOR HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A01S-GAT

(If installed)

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stop lightson either side of the car, the high mounted rearstop light in the center of the rear window orinserted in the rear spoiler also lights when thebrakes are applied.

B550A02E

WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such a mannerthat it obscures visibility of the roadway,traffic or other objects.

!

B580A01L-GAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to givethe driver and front passenger either frontal orsideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut outdirect rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the sunvisor for the driver and front passenger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)label containing useful information can befound on the back of each sun visor.

Vanity mirror

B580A01E

B520B02O-GAT

Electric type (If installed)

The electric type day/night inside rearview mir-ror automatically controls the glare of headlightsof the car behind you.

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dim-ming function OFF which is indicated by thegreen Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated bythe green Status Indicator LED turning on.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "ON" positioneach time the vehicle is started.

HLZ2068-1

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM71


72

!

2. Pull the secondary latch lever up and lift thehood.

3. Hold the hood open with the support rod.

Before closing the hood, return the support rodto its clip to prevent it from rattling. Lower thehood until it is about 1 ft. (30 cm) above theclosed position and let it drop. Make sure that itlocks into place.

WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that the

hood is firmly latched before drivingaway. If it is not latched, the hood couldopen while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.

o The support rod must be inserted com-pletely into the hole provided in thehood whenever you inspect the enginecompartment. This will prevent the hoodfrom falling and possibly injuring you.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision is ob-structed and the hood could fall or bedamaged.

! CAUTION:Make sure that the support rod has beenreleased prior to closing the hood.

B570A02E-AAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

HOOD RELEASE

HXD570

HXDFL570-A

FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNINGLIGHT

B620A01S-AAT

(If installed)

B620A01E

A red light turns on when the front door isopened. The purpose of this light is to assistwhen you get in or out and also to warn passingvehicles.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM72


73FLOOR MAT ANCHOR REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LIDRELEASE

B560A03E-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside thevehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid openerlocated on the front floor area on the left side ofthe vehicle.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open because icehas formed around it, tap lightly or push onthe lid to break the ice and release the lid. Donot pry on the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved deicer fluid (do notuse radiator anti-freeze) or move the ve-hicle to a warm place and allow the ice tomelt.

4 DOOR

HXDFL5615 DOOR

! WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed

on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slipsand interferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, it may cause anaccident.

o Don't put an additional floor mat on thetop of the anchored floor, otherwise theadditional mat may slide forward andinterfere with the movement of the ped-als.

B990A03Y-AAT

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor inyour vehicle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.

HXGS263

! WARNING:o The fuel cap must be tightened at least

3 clicks, otherwise light will illum-inate.

o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Beforerefueling, always stop the engine andnever allow sparks or open flames nearthe filler area. If you need to replace thefiller cap, use a genuine Hyundai re-placement part.

B560B01E

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM73


74

!! WARNING:o If you open the fuel filler cap during high

ambient temperatures, a slight "pres-sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-mal and not a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replacedand securely seated after fueling. Failureto replace or fully seat the fuel filler capwill result in fuel vapors escaping intothe atmosphere and the MIL indicatorilluminating.

o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzleshut off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explo-sive materials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines carefully.

o Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuelfiller cap, have one's hands in contactwith metal parts away from the filler neckto discharge static electricity.

o Do not get back in the vehicle whilerefueling. Do not operate anything thatcan produce static electricity. Static elec-tricity discharge can ignite fuel vaporsresulting in an explosion.

WARNING:The trunk lid should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is in motion. Ifit is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gasesmay enter the car resulting in serious illness ordeath to the occupants. See additional warn-ings concerning exhaust gases on page 2-2.

!

B540A01E-GAT

TRUNK LID (4 DOOR)Remote Trunk Lid Release

To open the trunk lid without using the key, pullup the lid release lever.To close, lower the trunk lid, then press downon it until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid issecurely fastened try to pull it up again.

TRUNK LID / TAIL GATE

B540A02E

o When using a portable fuel container, besure to place the container on the groundwhile refueling. Static electricity dis-charge from the container can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. While starting re-fueling contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

o Do not use cellular phones around a gasstation. The electric current or electronicinterference from cellular phones canignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

o When refueling, always turn the engineoff. Sparks by engine compartment elec-trical equipment can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. After refueling, check tomake sure the fuel filler cap is securelyclosed, and then start the engine.

o Do not smoke or try to light cigarettesaround a gas station. Automotive fuelsare flammable.

WARNING:

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM74


75

!

B540B02E-AAT

Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Release

B540E02E-A

Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-the darkemergency trunk release lever located insidethe trunk. It will glow after the trunk is closed.When pulled, this lever will release the trunklatch mechanism and open the trunk.

Pull to open the trunk

B540C01S-AAT

To Unlock Using the Key

To open the trunk lid, insert the key and turn itclockwise to unlock. The trunk lid compartmentlight illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.

B540C02E

NOTE:o If a person is locked in the trunk, pull the

emergency trunk release lever on thedriver's side of the inside panel of thetrunk to open the trunk lid.

o HYUNDAI recommends that cars be keptlocked and keys be kept out of the reachof children, and that parents teach theirchildren about the dangers of playing intrunks.

WARNING:Parents should teach children about theemergency trunk release lever in their ve-hicle and how to open the trunk lid if theyare accidentally locked in the trunk.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM75


76 LUGGAGE NET

The storage box is located in the right side of theluggage compartment floor.

HXDFL035

Storage Box B540D01E-GAT

(If installed)

When loading objects in the luggage compart-ment, use the four rings located in the luggagecompartment floor to attach the luggage net asshown illustration. This will help prevent theobjects from sliding.

HXDFL1025-1

B540F03E-GAT

TAIL GATE (5 DOOR)Operation From Outside The Vehicle

To open the tail gate, only need the key if thetailgate is locked. If the tailgate is unlocked, pullthe outside handle toward you.

B540F02E-A

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM76


77STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER

!

B600A01A-AAT

(If installed)

To Adjust the Steering Wheel:

1. Push the lever downward to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the

desired position.3. After adjustment, securely tighten the lever

by pulling it upward.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheelwhile driving as this may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle which may causeserious injury or death.

HXDFL600

! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch theluggage net. ALWAYS keep your face andbody out of its path. DO NOT use when theluggage net strap have visible signs of wearor damage.

CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when carryingfragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

!

HORN

B610A01Y-AAT

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound thehorn.

B610A01E

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM77


78

!

5. To momently increase speed, depress theaccelerator pedal enough for the vehicle toexceed the preset speed. When you removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal, thevehicle will return to the speed you have set.

WARNING:To avoid accidental cruise control engage-ment, keep the cruise control main switchoff when not using the cruise control.

CRUISE CONTROL

B660A01S-AAT

(If installed)B660B02E-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

The cruise control system provides automaticspeed control for your comfort when driving onfreeways, tollroads, or other noncongestedhighways. This system is designed to functionabove approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

1. Push in the cruise control main switch on theend of the barrel. The "CRUISE" indicatorlight in the instrument cluster will be illumi-nated. This turns the system on.

2. Accelerate to the desired cruising speedabove 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Push the cruise control switch downward to"SET (COAST)" and release it. If the "SET"(COAST)" switch is selected the "CRUISE"and "SET"(COAST) indicator light in theinstrument cluster will be illuminated simulta-neously.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedaland the desired speed will automatically bemaintained.

B660A01E-A B660B01E-A

Main Switch

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM78


79

B660D01E-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

B660E01E-AAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch upward to the "RE-SUME (ACCEL)" position and hold it.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and release thecontrol switch. While the control switch isheld, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

B660C04E-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed

To disengage the cruise control system, pull thecontrol switch toward the steering wheel to the"CANCEL" position.Additionally, the followingactions will disengage the system:

o Depress the brake pedal.o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle).o Shift the selector lever to "P" or "N" position

(Automatic transaxle).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25

mph (40 km/h).o Release the main switch.

The vehicle will automatically resume the speedset prior to cancellation when you push thecontrol switch upward to the "RESUME(ACCEL)" position and release it, providing thevehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).

B660C01E-A B660D01E-A

B660F02E-AAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

1. Push the control switch downward to "SET(COAST)" and hold it. The vehicle will decel-erate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained, releasethe control switch. While the control switchis pushed, the vehicle speed will graduallydecrease.

B660B01E-A

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM79


80

! WARNING:o Keep the main switch off when not using

the cruise control.o Use the cruise control system only when

traveling on open highways in goodweather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slippery(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or windingroads or over 6% up-hill or down-hillroads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During cruise-control driving with amanual transaxle vehicle, do not shiftinto neutral without depressing theclutch pedal, or the engine will beoverrevved. If this happens, depress theclutch pedal or release the main switch.

o With the cruise control engaged, whenthe brake pedal is applied, it is normal tohear the cruise control system deacti-vate. This is an indication of normalsystem operation.

o During normal cruise control operation,when the "SET(COAST)" is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize afterapproximately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.

xdflhma-1a.p65 2/5/2008, 2:04 PM80


81HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01E-GAT

(If Installed)

1. Side Defrost Nozzle2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defrost Nozzle4. Center Ventilator

B710B01S-AAT

CENTER VENTILATOR

The center ventilators are located in the middleof the dashboard. The direction of air flow fromthe vents in the center of the dashboard isadjustable.To control the direction of the air flow, move theknob in the center of the vent up-and-down andside-to-side.

B710C02HP-AAT

SIDE VENTILATOR

The side ventilators are located on each side ofthe dashboard. To change the direction of theair flow, move the knob in the center of the ventup-and-down and side-to-side. The vents areopened when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are closed when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

B710A02E-A

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM81


82 HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670A01A-AAT

Rotary type (If installed)

This model has four controls for the heating andcooling system. They are:

1. Air flow control2. Air intake control3. Temperature control4. Fan speed control

HXDOM046-A

1 2 3

4B670C01E-A

B670D01E-AAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, dashboard outlets, orwindshield. Five symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and De-frost air position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside ofthe vehicle faster.

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to bedischarged through the face level vents.

HXDFL539-A

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM82


83

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents and thefloor vents.

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated.

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defrostnozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/Cwill turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.

HXDFL543-AHXDFL540-A HXDFL541-A

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM83


84

MAXA/C

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turnon automatically and "Fresh" mode will be ac-tivated to improve windshield defrosting.

NOTE:If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode isselected, the air conditioning will not turnoff by pushing the A/C button.If the air flow control is set to the defrost orthe floor-defrost mode, the A/C will be onautomatically and the A/C will not turn offuntil the air flow control is set to the another

HXDFL542-A

MAX A/C-Level

Air is discharged through the face level vents.If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Recirculation" modewill be activated.

HXDFL544-A

mode except the defrost mode and thefloor-defrost mode. Although the A/Cswitch indicator is turned off, this is normaloperation.

* The A/C or the air intake control switchreturns to its former setting.

A/C

ON

ON or OFF *

ON or OFF *

ON

ON

Air Intake

Control Switch

or *

NOTE:When you change to another mode fromMAX A/C, the A/C and the air intake controlswitch are set as shown in the followingchart.

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM84


85

B670C02E-AAT

Air Intake Control

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculating of inside air.To change the air intake control mode, (Freshmode, Recirculation mode) push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light onthe button goes off when the air intake controlis in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The indicatorlight on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is in recirculation mode.

B670C02E-A

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

This control is used to adjust the degree ofheating or cooling desired.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating in "Recirculation"mode may result in fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolongeduse of the air conditioning with the "Re-circulation" mode selected may result inthe air within the passenger compart-ment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to"Fresh" mode in floor, floor-defrost anddefrost position. This is normal opera-tion.

B670E02A-A

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM85


86 BI-LEVEL HEATING

B690A01E-AAT

For normal heating operation, set the air intakecontrol to the fresh air ( ) position and the airflow control to the floor ( ) position.

For faster heating, the air intake control shouldbe set in the recirculate ( ) position.

If the windows fog up, set the air flow control tothe defrost ( ) position. (The A/C will be onautomatically and "Fresh" mode will be acti-vated.)

For maximum heat, rotate the temperaturecontrol to "Warm".

B690A01E-A

HEATING CONTROLS

B700A01E-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heatingcontrols.

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( )position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

B700A01E-A

B670B03E-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

This is used to turn the blower fan on or off andto select the fan speed.This blower fan speed, and therefore the vol-ume of air delivered from the system, may becontrolled manually by setting the blower con-trol between the "1" and "4" positions."1" is lowest and "4" is the highest fan speed.

NOTE:If the blower fan is off, the air intake controlis set to the fresh mode automatically.

B670A01E-A

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM86


87VENTILATION

B710A01S-AAT

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode( ).

o To direct all intake air to the dashboardvents, set the airflow control to "Face".

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

B710A01E-A

B730A01L-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilation sys-tem, temporarily set the air intake control to( ).Be sure to return the control to ( ) whenthe irritation has passed to keep fresh air inthe vehicle. This will help keep the driver alertand comfortable.

o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawnin through the grilles just ahead of the wind-shield. Care should be taken that these arenot blocked by leaves, snow, ice or otherobstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, setthe air intake control to the fresh air ( )position, fan speed to the desired position,turn on the air conditioning system, andadjust temperature control to desired tem-perature.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-ditioning control panel.

B740A02E-A

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM87


88

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.For greater cooling, turn the fan control toone of the higher speeds or temporarilyselect the "Recirculation" position on the airintake control.

B740B01E-AAT

Air Conditioning OperationCooling

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-

ing in on the switch. The air conditioningindicator light should come on at the sametime.

o Set the air intake control to the "Fresh" mode( ).

o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"provides maximum cooling. The tempera-ture may be moderated by moving the con-trol toward "Warm".)

B740B01E-A

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM88


89

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may causefog to form on the exterior windshield. If this occurs set the air flow control to the face level position( ) and fan speed control to the low position.

To remove interior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.

(The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" modewill be activated.)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.

(The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" modewill be activated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

B720A01E-AAT

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A02E-AB720A03E-A

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield:

A Type B Type A Type B Type

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM89


90

B740D01A-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when you firstget in, open the windows for a few minutesto expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air conditioningsystem, keep all windows closed to keep hotair out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shiftto a lower gear. This increases engine speed,which in turn increases the speed of the airconditioning compressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning offto avoid the possibility of the engine over-heating.

o During winter months or in periods when theair conditioning is not used regularly, run theair conditioning once every month for a fewminutes. This will help circulate the lubri-cants and keep your system in peak oper-ating condition.

B740C01S-AAT

Dehumidified HeatingFor dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air

conditioning indicator light should come on atthe same time.

o Set the air intake control to the "Fresh" mode( ).

o Set the air flow control to "Face".o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of

the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to provide the

desired amount of warmth.

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM90


91AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If lnstalled)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automaticheating and cooling control system controlledby simply setting the desired temperature.

B970B01E-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Temperature Control Switch2. Display Window3. Blower Fan Control Switch4. Air Flow Control Switch5. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch6. Defroster Switch7. OFF Switch8. Air Conditioning Switch9. Air lntake Control Switch/Air Quality

System Switch (If installed)10.Rear Window Defroster Switch11.Ambient Temperature Switch

TYPE A (Without A.Q.S: Air Quality System)

TYPE B (With A.Q.S: Air Quality System)HXDOM118

HXDOM119

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9 1011

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM91


92

NOTE:If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode will resetto Centigrade degrees.This is a normal condition and you canchange the temperature mode from Centi-grade to Farenheit as follows;Press the TEMP button down 3 seconds ormore with the button held down. Thedisplay shows that the unit of temperatureis adjusted to Centigrade or Fahrenheit.(°C → → → → → °F or °F →→→→→ °C)

B970C02E-AAT

Automatic Operation

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-trol) system automatically controls heating andcooling by doing as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" button. The indicator lightwill illuminate confirming that the Face, Floorand/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blowerspeed and air conditioner will be controlledautomatically.

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desiredtemperature.The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum 90°F(32°C) by pushing on the " "button. Each push of the button will cause thetemperature to increase by 1°F(0.5°C).The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum 62°F(17°C) by pushing on the " "button. Each push of the button will cause thetemperature to decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).

NOTE:Never place anything over the sensor whichis located on the instrument panel to en-sure better control of the heating and cool-ing system.

Photo sensorHXD118D

HXD118A

OUTSIDETEMP

HXDFL280S

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM92


93

B995A01Y-GAT

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SWITCHB980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be con-trolled manually as well by pushing buttonsother than the "AUTO" button. In this state, thesystem sequentially works according to theorder of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are not se-lected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert toautomatic control of the system.

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control Switch

Pressing the button displays the ambienttemperature on the display.

The fan speed can be set to the desired speedby pressing the appropriate fan speed controlbutton. The higher the fan speed is, the more airis delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns offthe fan.

OUTSIDETEMP

HXD118IHXD118C

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM93


94

B670C01E-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch(Without A.Q.S)

B980C03E-GAT

Air Intake Control Switch (With A.Q.S)(If installed)

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation of inside air.To change the air intake control mode, (Freshmode, Recirculation mode) push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light onthe button goes off when the air intake controlis in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indica-tor light on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is in recirculation mode.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.


tion of the heating system in "Recircula-tion" mode will give rise to fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolongeduse of the air conditioning with the "Re-circulation" mode selected may result inthe air within the passenger compart-ment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON",the air intake control will change to ( )"Fresh"mode (regardless of the switchposition). This is normal operation. Theair intake control operates in "AUTO"mode when turning the ignition to the"ON" position if the "AUTO" mode wasused before shutting off the engine.

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculate inside air automatically.

: OFF: ON

Fresh Mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside and isheated or cooled according to the functionselected.

HXD118G HXD118H

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM94


95

B980E01E-GAT

Air Flow Control

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation ofthe heating and cooling system.

Recirculation Mode :

Air from within the passenger compartment willbe drawn through the heating system and heatedor cooled according to the function selected.

Exhaust Gas Cutoff Mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside.But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from theoutside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( ) isautomatically converted to the ( ) mode, toprevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.


tion of the heating system in recircula-tion mode ( ) may result in misting ofthe windshield and side windows andthe air within the passenger compart-ment will become stale. In addition, pro-longed use of the air conditioning withthe recirculation mode ( ) selectedmay result in the air within the passengercompartment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to ( )mode except for turning "OFF" the igni-tion switch in A.Q.S mode ( ). It isnormal operation. The air intake controlis operated in "AUTO" mode when turn-ing the ignition to the "ON" position ifthe "AUTO" mode was used before shut-ting off the engine.

!

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, dashboard outlets, orwindshield. Four symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost airposition.

CAUTION:If the windows fog up with the Recircula-tion or A.Q.S mode selected, set the airintake control to the Fresh air position orA.Q.S control to "OFF".

B980E01E

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM95


96

Face-LevelWhen selecting the "Face" mode, the indicatorlight will come on, causing air to be dischargedthrough the face level vents.

Bi-LevelWhen selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indica-tor light will come on and the air will be dis-charged through the face vents and the floorvents.

Floor-LevelWhen selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the floor vents, windshielddefrost nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.

HXDFL539-A HXDFL540-A HXDFL541-A

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM96


97AIR CONDITIONER FILTER(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)

B980F02E-AAT

Defrost SwitchB760A04E-AAT

Floor-Defrost LevelWhen selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the windshield defrost vents,the floor vents and side defroster nozzle sideventilator .

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the ( )mode will be automatically selected and the airwill be discharged through the windshield de-frost nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator. To assist in defrosting, the air condi-tioning will operate if ambient temperature ishigher than 38.3°F, and automatically turns offif the ambient temperature drops below 38.3°F.

The air conditioner filter is located in front of theblower unit behind the glove box.It operates to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.To replace the air conditioner filter, refer to page6-18.

HXDFL543-A

HXD118E

B760A01E

Evaporator core

Filter

Heater core

Outside air

Inside air

Inside air

Blower fan

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM97


98

CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles

(15,000 km) or once a year. If the car isbeing driven in severe conditions suchas dusty, rough roads, more frequent airconditioner filter inspections andchanges are required.

o When the air flow rate is decreased, itmust be checked at an authorized dealer.

o If your vehicle is not equipped with thisfilter, it can be installed by your dealer.Check with your dealer for details.

!

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM98


99STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed areaIron bridges

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequen-cies and do not bend to follow the earth'ssurface. Because of this, FM broadcasts gen-erally begin to fade at short distances from thestation. Also, FM signals are easily affected bybuildings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe a problem existswith your radio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radio trouble:

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is becauseAM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-cies. These long, low frequency radio wavescan follow the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast fromtransmitter towers located around your city.They are intercepted by the radio antenna onyour car. This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reached yourvehicle, the precise engineering of your audiosystem ensures the best possible quality repro-duction. However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

Ionosphere

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM99


100

!B750A04L B750A05L

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-ens, another more powerful signal near thesame frequency may begin to play. This isbecause your radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs, selectanother station with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals beingreceived from several directions can causedistortion or fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal from the samestation, or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition has passed.

o Fading - As your car moves away from theradio station, the signal will weaken andsound will begin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select another strongerstation.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter andyour radio can disturb the signal causingstatic or fluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen this effect until thedisturbance clears.

B750B03Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,noise may be produced from the audio equip-ment. This does not mean that something iswrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,use the cellular phone at a place as far aspossible from the audio equipment.

WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone when you aredriving. Stop at a safe place to use a cellularphone.

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM100


101CAR AUDIO SYSTEM

H240A01O-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H240) (If installed)

H240A01O

1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob(BASS/BAL)

3. TREBLE/FADER Control Knob(TREB/FAD)

4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

5. BAND Selector

6. PRESET Buttons 7. SCAN Button

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM101


102

H240B04O-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press theknob to switch the power on. The LCD showsthe radio frequency in the radio mode or the tapedirection indicator in the tape mode. To switchthe power off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

2. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired bass tone.

BAL (Balance Control) Knob

Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn thecontrol knob clockwise to emphasize rightspeaker sound (left speaker sound will beattenuated).When the control knob is turned counterclock-wise, left speaker sound will be emphasized(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. TREB (Treble Control) Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Pull the treble control knob further out.Turn the control knob counterclockwise toemphasize front speaker sound (rear speakersound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned clockwise, rearspeaker sound will be emphasized (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated).

4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or todecrease the frequency. Press either buttonand hold down to continuously scroll. Releasebutton once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button 0.5 sec or more.Releasing it will automatically tune to the nextavailable station with a beep sound.When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 0.5second, releasing will automatically tune to thenext higher frequency and when the ( ) sideis pressed longer than 0.5 second, releasing willautomatically tune to the next lower frequency.

5. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM,FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected isdisplayed on LCD.

6. PRESET STATION SELECT Button

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit on this unit.

FM/AM

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM102


103

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM1, or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory with a beep sound. You shouldthen release the button, and proceed toprogram the next desired station. A total of18 stations can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM stations per button.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

7. SCAN Button

When the scan button is pressed, the frequencywill increase and the receivable stations will betuned in one after another, receiving each sta-tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press thescan button again.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact or strike the audio system,or the playback mechanism could bedamaged.

!

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM103


104

H240C01O-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H240) (If installed)

H240A01O

1. FF/REW Button

2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

4. EJECT Button

5. DOLBY SELECT Button

6. TAPE SLOT

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM104


105

H240A03O-GAT

1. FF/REW Buttono The FF (fast forward tape winding) starts

when the button is pressed during thePLAY or REW.

o The play starts when the button is press-ed again during the FF.

o The REW (rewinding) starts when the bu-tton is pressed during the PLAY or FF.

o The play starts when the button is press-ed again during the REW.

2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button

Press the button to find the starting point of eachsong in a prerecorded music tape.The quiet space between songs (must have atleast a 4 sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTOMUSIC SELECT button.

o Pressing the button will play the beginn-ing of the next music segment.

o Pressing the button will start replay atthe beginning of the music just listened to.


This allows you to play the reverse side of thetape by merely depressing the program button.An arrow will appear in the display to show tapedirection.

NOTE:When tape operation is abnormal or ER8fault code is displayed, press the ejectbutton more than 5 seconds to reset thedeck function.

4. EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed with thecassette loaded, the cassette is ejected.

o When the EJECT button is pressed duringthe FF/REW, the cassette is ejected.

5. DOLBY SELECT Button

If you get background noise during PLAY, youcan reduce this considerably by merely press-ing DOLBY SELECT button.If you want to release, press the button again.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.


xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM105


106

H260A01O-AAT


H260A01O

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob

2. FADER Control Knob

3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob

4. SCAN Button

5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

6. BAND Selector

7. PRESET Button

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM106


107

H260B03E-AAT


The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press theknob to switch the power on. The LCD showsthe radio frequency in the radio mode or the CDtrack indicator in either the CD mode or CDAUTO CHANGER mode. To switch the poweroff, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control


BALANCE Control

Pull and turn the control knob clockwise toemphasize right speaker sound (left speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speaker soundwill be attenuated).

2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Turn the control knob counterclockwise toemphasize front speaker sound (rear speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned clockwise, rear speaker soundwill be emphasized (front speaker sound will beattenuated).

3. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired bass tone.

TREB (Treble Control) Knob

Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn to theleft or right for the desired treble tone.

4. SCAN Button




SEEK Operation(Automatic Channel Selection)Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 sec ormore. Releasing it will automatically tune to thenext available station with a beep sound.When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 0.5second, releasing will automatically tune to thenext higher frequency and when the ( ) sideis pressed longer than 0.5 second, releasing willautomatically tune to the next lower frequency.

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM,FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected isdisplayed on LCD.

7. PRESET STATION SELECT Button

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit on this unit.

FM/AM

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM107


108


Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly.To program the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM1 or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek, scan or manual tuning.


o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory.You should then release the button, andproceed to program the next desired station.A total of 18 stations can be programmed byselecting one AM and two FM stations perbutton.


CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the



!

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM108


109

H260B01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

H260A01O

1.Playing CD

2. FF/REW Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. SCAN Button

5. REPEAT Button

6. EJECT Button

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM109


110

B260D04O-AAT

1. Playing CD

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation.o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the play button, the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio is being used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold in the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginn-ing of the next track. Press once to skipback to the beginning of the track.

4. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.for the desired track.

5. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are listening to,press the RPT button. To cancel , pressagain.

o If you do not release RPT operation, whenthe track ends, it will automatically be re-played.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

6. EJECT Button

When the EJECT button is pressed with theCD loaded, the CD is ejected.

NOTE:o If the CD does not operate properly or if

the ER2 fault code is displayed, use oneof two methods to reset the CD deckfunction.- Remove the audio fuse for 5 minutes.

Then, reinstall the audio fuse.- Disconnect the negative terminal of

the battery and wait 5 minutes.Then reconnect the negative batteryterminal.

o To assure proper operation of the unit,keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have to beset again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers and othermetallic objects away from the tapemechanism and head.

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM110


111

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers) to water or excessivemoisture.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.



o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or damage the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, professionally recorded CDs arerecommended.

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM111


112

B260E01E-AAT

CD AUTO CHANGER (H260) (If installed)

H260A01O

1. CD Select Button

2. DISC Select Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. FF/REW Button

5. REPEAT Button

6. SCAN Button

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM112


113

3. TRACK UP/DOWN


o Press once to skip forward to the begin-ning of the next track. Press once to skipback to the beginning of the track.

4. FF/REW ( / )


5. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are listening to,press the RPT button. To cancel , pressagain.

o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

B260F03E-AAT

The CD auto changer is located in the leftside of the trunk.

o To use the CD auto changer.

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press

the EJECT button located inside the CD autochanger.

3. Insert the discs into the magazine.4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer

and close the sliding lid.

o The CD auto changer can be used when theignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC"position.

1. CD Select Button

When the CD changer magazine contains discs,press the CD button and the CD changer canbe used even if the radio is being used. TheHyundai CD changer can hold up to eight discs.The disc number will be lit, and the track number,and elapsed time will be displayed.


To select the CD you want, push to changethe disc number.

6. SCAN Button


o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.for the desired track.

NOTE:o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.



TUNEDISC

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM113


114


discs into the CD changer as damage tothe unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into thechanger slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.






xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:06 PM114


115

H290A01O-AAT


H290A01O

1. POWER ON/OFF VOLUME Control Knob

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

3. TREBLE/FAD Konb

4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button5. PRESET Buttons

6. BAND Select Button

7. EQUALIZER Button

8. SCAN Button

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM115


116

H290B04E-GAT


The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press thebutton to switch the power on. The displayshows the radio frequency in the radio mode,the tape direction indicator in the tape mode orCD track in either the CD mode or CD AUTOCHANGER mode. To switch the power off,press the button again.

VOLUME Control


2. BASS/BALANCE Control KnobBASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out. To increase the bass,rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease thebass, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

BALANCE Control knob

Pull the Bass control knob out further. Rotate theknob clockwise to emphasize right speakersound (left speaker sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned counterclock-wise, left speaker sound will be emphasized(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. TREBLE/FAD KnobTREBLE Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Pull the Treble control knob out further. Turn thecontrol knob counterclockwise to emphasizefront speaker sound (rear speaker sound will beattenuated). When the control knob is turnedclockwise, rear speaker sound will be empha-sized (front speaker sound will be attenuated).



SEEK Operation(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 sec ormore. Releasing it will automatically tune to thenext available station with a beep sound.When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 0.5second, releasing will automatically tune to thenext higher frequency and when the ( ) sideis pressed longer than 0.5 second and releasingwill automatically tune to the next lower fre-quency.

5. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit.

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM116


117

H290A01O


Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM1 or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek or manual tuning.


o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory with a beep sound. You shouldthen release the button, and proceed toprogram the next desired station. A total of18 stations can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM station per button.


CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM,FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected isshown on the display.

7. EQUALIZER Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

8. SCAN Button


FM/AM CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the



!

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM117


118

H290C01O-AAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H290) (If installed)

1. FF/REW Button

H290A01O

2. AUTO MUSICSelect Button


4. TAPE EJECT Button

5. EQUALIZERButton

6. DOLBY Button

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM118


119

H290D02O-GAT

1. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts when theFF ( ) button is pressed during PLAY orREW mode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the FF ( ) buttonis pressed again during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REW ( )button is pressed during PLAY or FF mode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the REW ( ) buttonpressed again during REW mode.

2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button

Press the button to find the starting point of eachsong in a prerecorded music tape. The quietspace between songs (must have at least a 4sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSICSelect button.

o Pressing the button will play the begin-ning of the next music segment.

o Pressing the button will start replay atthe beginning of the music just listened to.


This allows you to play the reverse side of thetape by merely depressing the program button.An arrow will appear in the display to show tapedirection.

4. TAPE EJECT button

o When the button is pressed with a cass-ette loaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the button is pressed during FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

5. EQ Button



6. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,you can reduce this considerably by merelypressing the DOLBY button. If you want tocancel the DOLBY feature, press the buttonagain.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.



xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM119


120

H290E01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H290) (If installed)

1. CD Select ButtonH290A01O

2. FF/REW Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. REPEAT

5. EQUALIZER Button

6. CD EJECT Button

7. SCAN Button

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM120


121

H290F03O-GAT

1. CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation or cassette tape playing.o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the CD button the CD player will begin playingeven if the radio or cassette player is beingused.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN


o Press button once to skip forward to thebeginning of the next track. Press buttononce to skip back to the beginning of thetrack.

4. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel,press again.


5. EQUALIZER Button


7. SCAN Button


o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.When you have reached the desired track.

NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.


o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have to beset again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers and othermetallic objects away from the tapemechanism and head.6. CD EJECT Button

When the button is pressed with a CD loaded,the CD will eject.


xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM121


122




o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.


discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.






xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM122


123

H290G01E-AAT

CD AUTO CHANGER (H290) (If installed)

1. CD CHANGER Select ButtonH290A01O

2.DISC Select Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. FF/REW Button

5. REPEAT

6. SCAN Button

7. EQUALIZER Button

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM123


124

3. TRACK UP/DOWN


o Press once to skip forward to the begin-ning of the next track. Press once to skipback to the beginning of the track.

4. FF/REW ( / )


5. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel,press again.


B290H03E-GAT

The CD auto changer is located in the left sideof the trunk.

o To use the CD auto changer.

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press

the EJECT button located inside the CD autochanger.

3. Insert the discs into the magazine.4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer

and close the sliding lid.

o The CD auto changer can be used when theignition switch is in either "ON" or "ACC"position.

1. CD CHANGER Select Button

When the CD changer magazine contains discs,press the "CD/CDC" button and the CD changercan be used even if the radio or cassette playeris being used. The Hyundai CD changer canhold up to eight discs. The disc number will belit, and the track number, and elapsed time willbe displayed.


To select the CD you want, push to changethe disc number.

6. SCAN Button


o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.When you have reached the desired track.

7. EQUALIZER Button


TUNEDISC

NOTE:






xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM124


125

CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD changer as damage tothe unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into thechanger slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.






!

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM125


126 AUDIO FAULT CODE

INDICATION

Er2

Er3

Er6

Er8

HHH

no CD

B890A01Y-AAT

If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below.If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

SOLUTION

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.

Then insert a normal CD disc.

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.

Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto changer.

CAUSE

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

FOCUS ERROR

DATA READ ERROR

DISC ERROR

TAPE DECK ERROR

TAPE EJECT ERROR

TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH

NO DISC IN MAGAZINE

NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM126


127CARE OF CASSETTE TAPESCARE OF DISC

B850A02F-AAT

Proper Handling

B850A01L

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop thedisc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Donot affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped orcracked discs. These could severely damagethe playback mechanism.

Storage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a cool placeaway from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with your handwhile the disc is being pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

B850A02L

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disccould cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a cleansoft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergentto wipe it clean.

B860A01A-AAT

Proper care of your cassette tapes will extendthe tape life and increase your listening enjoy-ment. Always protect your tapes and cassettecases from direct sunlight, severely cold anddusty conditions. When not in use, cassettesshould always be stored in the original protec-tive cassette case. When the vehicle is very hotor cold, allow the interior temperature to becomemore comfortable before listening to your cas-settes.

B860A01L

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM127


128

Head

Cotton applicator

B880A03E-A

B860A02L

o Never leave a cassette inserted in the playerwhen not being played. This could damagethe tape player unit and the cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against the use oftapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thinand do not perform as well in the automotiveenvironment.

o The playback head, capstan and pinch roll-ers will develop a coating of tape residue thatcan result in deterioration of sound quality,such as a wavering sound. They should becleaned monthly using a commercially avail-able head cleaning tape or special solutionavailable from audio specialty shops. Followthe supplier's directions carefully and neveroil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightly woundon its reel before inserting in the player.Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to windup any slack.

o Be sure that the cassette label is not looseor peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audio tapesurfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-tric motors, speakers or transformers awayfrom your cassette tapes and tape playerunit.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with theopen side facing down to prevent dust fromsetting in the cassette body.

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replayone given tune or tape section. This cancause poor tape winding to occur, and even-tually cause excessive internal drag andpoor audio quality in the cassette. If thisoccurs, it can sometimes be corrected byfast winding the tape from end to end severaltimes. If this does not correct the problem, donot continue to use the tape in your vehicle.

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM128


129ANTENNA

!

NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it.If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning oneof the hubs with a pencil or your finger.If the label is peeling off, do not put it in thedrive mechanism.Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,such as on top of the dashboard or in theplayer.If a tape is exposed to excessively hot orcold, let it reach a moderate temperaturebefore putting it in the player.

B860A03L

B870A01A-AAT

Fixed Rod Antenna

Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to receiveboth AM and FM broadcast signals.This antenna is a removable type. To removethe antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To installthe antenna, turn it clockwise.

CAUTION:o Be sure to remove the antenna before

washing the car in an automatic carwash or it may be damaged.

o When reinstalling your antenna, it isimportant that it is fully tightened toensure proper reception.

B870A01A

B870B01Y-AAT

Power Antenna (If installed)

The antenna will automatically be extendedwhen the radio power switch is turned on whilethe ignition key is in either the "ON" or "ACC"position. The antenna will automatically be re-tracted and stored when either the radio powerswitch is turned off or the ignition key is set tothe "LOCK" position.

B870B01E

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM129


130

CAUTION:o Do not clean the inner side of the rear

window glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper to removeforeign deposits from the inner surfaceof the glass as this may cause damage tothe antenna elements.

o Avoid adding metallic coating (Someaftermarket window tinting has metalliccontents). These can disturb receivingAM and FM broadcast signals.

!B870D02Y-GAT

Glass Antenna (If installed)

When the radio power switch is turned on whilethe ignition key is in either the "ON" or "ACC"position, your car will receive both AM and FMbroadcast signals through the antenna in therear window glass.

B870D01E-A

CAUTION:o Before turning on the radio, make sure

that no one is near the antenna.o Before entering an automatic car wash

or a place with a low height clearance,turn off the radio and be sure that theantenna is retracted and stored.

o If the antenna is dirty, be sure to clean itin order to avoid an operation malfunc-tion.

!

xdflhma-1b.p65 2/5/2008, 2:07 PM130

Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3To Start The Engine ...................................................... 2-3Key Positions ................................................................ 2-3Starting .......................................................................... 2-4Operating the Manual Transaxle ................................... 2-5Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-7Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-11Traction Control System (TCS) .................................. 2-11Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-14Smooth Cornering ....................................................... 2-15Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-15Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-17Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-20


22

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM1

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A02A-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a changein the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checkedas soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage anylonger than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intakeset at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk /tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clearof snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishingsin a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm.In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM2


3

2TO START THE ENGINE KEY POSITIONSBEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

!

C020A01A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there areno flat tires, puddles of oil, water or otherindications of possible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be sure theparking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows and lights are clean.4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors

are clean and in position.5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to

be sure they are in their proper positions.6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all

other occupants have fastened theirs.8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are

not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",

check that all appropriate warning lights areoperating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10.Check the operation of warning lights and allbulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

C030A01A-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manualtransaxle, place the shift lever in neutral anddepress the clutch pedal fully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,place the shift lever in "P" (park).

o To start the engine, insert the ignition key andturn it to the "START" position. Release it assoon as the engine starts. Do not hold thekey in the "START" position for more than 15seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if the

clutch pedal is not depressed fully(Manual Transaxle) or the shift lever isnot in "P" or "N" Position (AutomaticTransaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turned from"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)position or the negative battery terminalis disconnected from the battery. Toremove the key, always confirm that theshift lever is securely positioned in "P"(Park) (For Automatic Transaxle)

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-4.

C040A01A-AAT

WARNING:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylinderwhile the vehicle is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing the key.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crankuntil you release the key.

C040A01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM3


4 STARTING

!

C070C01A-AAT

To Remove the Ignition KeyC050A01A-AAT

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition

key counterclockwise from the "ACC" po-sition to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is needed tomove your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.

C070C01E-1

C050A01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" positionfor more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignitionis on and all accessories may be turned on. Ifthe engine is not running, the key should not beleft in the "ON" position. This will discharge thebattery and may also damage the ignition sys-tem.

o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" position, some elec-trical accessories (radio, etc.) may be oper-ated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition. To protect against theft, the steeringwheel locks by removing the key.

NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key,and then turn the steering wheel and keysimultaneously.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM4


5

2MANUAL TRANSAXLE

C050B01A-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the

gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutralor the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in"P" (park) position.

3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"position, make certain all warning lights andgauges are functioning properly before start-ing the engine.

WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully depressedwhen starting a manual transaxle vehicle.Your manual transaxle equipped vehiclewill not start unless the clutch pedal is fullydepressed. On a manual transaxle equippedvehicle that can be started without de-pressing the clutch, there is the potential tocause damage to the vehicle or injury tosomeone inside or outside the vehicle as aresult of the forward or backward move-ment of the vehicle that will occur if theclutch is not depressed when the vehicle isstarted.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START" positionand release it when the engine starts.After the engine has started, allow the engineto run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placingthe vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated for morethan 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-onds between starting attempts to protectthe starter from overheating.

!

C070A02A-AAT

OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE

Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a con-ventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is im-printed on the shift knob. The transaxle is fullysynchronized in all forward gears so shifting toeither a higher or a lower gear is easily accom-plished.

HXDFL1023

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM5


6

C070B03A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to thefloor before shifting, then released slowly. Theclutch pedal should always be fully releasedwhile driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving. This can cause unneces-sary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the caron an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold thecar on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedalrapidly and repeatedly.

C070E03A-AAT

Recommended Shift Points

The shift points as shown above are recom-mended for optimum fuel economy and perfor-mance.

Shift

from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

Recommended

mph (km/h)

15 (20)

25 (40)

35 (55)

45 (75)

NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in

neutral for at least 3 seconds after yourcar is completely stopped. Then movethe lever into the reverse position.

o During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricant haswarmed up. This is normal and not harm-ful to the transaxle.

o If you 've come to a complete stop andit's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),put the shift lever in N(Neutral) positionand release the clutch. Press the clutchpedal down, and then shift into 1st orR(Reverse) gear position.

o Do not use the shift lever as a handrestduring driving, as this can result in pre-mature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

CAUTION:When downshifting from fifth gear to fourthgear, caution should be taken not to inad-vertently press the gear shift lever sidewaysin such a manner that second gear is en-gaged. Such a drastic downshift may causethe engine speed to increase to the pointthat the tachometer will enter the red zone.Such over-revving of the engine may causeengine damage.

!

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM6


7

2AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

!C070D03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This is extremely hazardous.Always leave the car in gear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause themto overheat and malfunction. Instead, whenyou are driving down a long hill, slow downand shift to a lower gear. When you do this,engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.This will help avoid over-revving the engine,which can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter cross winds.This gives you much better control of yourcar.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into reverse. Thetransaxle can be damaged if you do not. Toshift into reverse, depress the clutch, movethe shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds,then shift to the reverse position.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision, unbelted person is signifi-cantly more likely to be seriously injuredor killed than a person wearing a seatbelt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.


o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o In a collision, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

C090A02Y-AAT

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas four forward speeds and one reversespeed. It has a conventional shift pattern asshown in the illustration. At night, with the multi-function switch turned on to the parking light orheadlight position, the appropriate symbol onthe shift pattern indicator will be illuminatedaccording to the range selected.

! CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.

C090A01E-M

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM7


8

C090E01A-AAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four-gear sequence.Never downshift manually to "2" position or "L"position when vehicle speed is more than 60mph (96 km/h).

C090D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090Q01A-GAT

o 3 (Third gear):

Use for towing a trailer during hill climbing or touse engine braking downhill."3" automatically shifts between 1st, 2nd and3rd gears. This means that no shift-up to 4thgear is performed. However, the shift-up to 4thgear is done when the car speed exceeds acertain value to prevent the engine from over-revving. Manually move the selector to "D"when returning to normal driving condition.

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and push thebutton when shifting.

Push the button when shifting.

The selector lever can be shifted freely.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if thebattery has been disconnected, may be some-what abrupt. This is a normal condition, and theshifting sequence will adjust after shifts arecycled a few times by the T.C.M (TransaxleControl Module.)

!

C090B01A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine; shift the selector leverto the "P" (Park) position. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.

C090C01A-AAT

o R (Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

HXD007

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM8


9

2

!

C090I02Y-AAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when

the vehicle has completely stopped.o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse

or any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R", "D", "3", "2"or "L" position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicle un-attended while the engine is running.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.See the maintenance schedule for theproper fluid recommendation.

C090F01A-AAT

o 2 (Second gear):

Use for driving on a slippery road, hill climbingor engine braking downhill. "2" automaticallyshifts between first and second gears.This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear isperformed. However, the shift-up to third gearis done when the car speed exceeds a certainvalue to prevent the engine from over-revving.Manually move the selector to "D" returning tonormal driving condition.

C090G01A-AAT

o L (Low gear):

Use for driving up a very steep grade or forengine braking when descending steep hills.When downshifting to "L", the transaxle willtemporarily remain in second gear until thevehicle has slowed enough for low gear toengage. Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h) in lowgear.

C090H01Y-AAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from"N"(Neutral) position or "P"(Park) posi-tion to a forward or "R"(Reverse) gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", "D", "3", "2", "L" position to "P"position. The vehicle must be fullystopped to avoid transaxle damage.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM9


10

!

C090N03A-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"or "N" to any other position with the accelera-tor pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into "R".

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremely hazard-ous. Always leave the car in gear whenmoving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. Instead,when you are driving down a long hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-gaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keepthe car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision, unbelted person is signifi-cantly more likely to be seriously injuredor killed than a person wearing a seatbelt.



o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o Turn the overdrive switch on for good fueleconomy and smooth driving. If engine brak-ing is needed in the "D" range or if repeatedupshifting and downshifting between the 3rdand 4th gear is needed when climbing agentle slope, it is recommended that theoverdrive switch be turned off. Turn theoverdrive switch back on immediately after-ward.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o In a collision, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.o Excessive depressing of the accelerater

pedal in slippery driving conditions suchas pulling out of deep snow or mud maycause severe damage to the transaxle.Rocking the vehicle is not recommended.Rather, use an appropriate towingmethod.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM10


11

2TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM(TCS)

C300A02Y-GAT

(If installed)

On slippery road surfaces, the traction controlsystem (TCS) limits the drive wheels fromspinning excessively, thus helping the car toaccelerate. It also helps to provide sufficientdriving force and steering performance as thecar turns.

! WARNING:ABS will not prevent accidents due to im-proper or dangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always main-tain a safe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should alwaysbe reduced during extreme road condi-tions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicle shouldbe driven at reduced speeds:

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is pit-

ted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by high speeddriving or cornering. This could endangerthe safety of yourself or others.

C300A02E

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS)

C120A02A-AAT

(If installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto prevent wheel lock-up during sudden brakingor on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABSwill increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:During ABS operation, a pulsation may befelt in the brake pedal when the brakes areapplied. Also, a noise may be heard in theengine compartment while braking. Theseconditions are normal and indicate that theanti-lock brake system is functioning prop-erly.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM11


12

C310B01O-AAT

TCS ON/OFF Mode

When the TCS is operating, the TCS indicatorin the instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing the TCSswitch, the TCS-OFF indicator will come on andstay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP controlwill be deactivated. Adjust you driving accord-ingly. To turn the system back on, press theswitch again. The TCS-OFF indicator should gooff.

NOTE:1) The TCS mode will automatically be

turned "ON" after the engine is turnedoff and restarted.

2) When the traction control system isoperating properly, you can feel a slightpulsation in the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control and indicatesnothing unusual.

3) When the engine starts, a click may beheard from the engine compartment;this is the sound of the traction controlbeing checked.

4) When moving out of the mud or freshsnow, pressing the accelerator pedalmay not cause the engine speed to in-crease due to TCS operation.

C310D01O-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The TCS indicators should illuminate when theignition key is turned to "ON" or "START" butshould go out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS orTCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in theTCS system while driving, TCS-OFF indicatorilluminates as a warning.If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your carto a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:1) When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,

traction control is automatically deacti-vated .

2) This warning function is not providedwhen the driver selects the TCS-OFFmode.

!

SLIP Control

Limits the drive wheels from spinning exces-sively during starting or while making acceler-ated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing thedriving force of the front wheels.

Driving hints

TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure todecelerate the car sufficiently before enteringcurves.

CAUTION:When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP controlhas been activated. It also means that theroad is slippery or your car is acceleratingexcessively. In this situation, release footpressure from the accelerator pedal andmaintain moderate speed.

!

WARNING:Traction control is only a driving aid; allnormal precautions for driving in inclem-ent weather and on slippery driving sur-faces should be observed.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM12


13

2

!

C130A01A-AAT

Good braking practices

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes may cause the car topull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply thebrakes lightly while driving slowly until thebraking action returns to normal, taking careto keep the car under control at all times. Ifthe braking action does not return to normal,stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call yourHyundai dealer for assistance.

WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top of theshelf panel behind the rear seat. If therewere an accident or a sudden stop, suchobjects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-pants.

o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep the carin gear at all times, use the brakes to slowdown, then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving can bedangerous because it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effectiveness. Italso increases the wear of the brake com-ponents.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, applythe brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to be safeto do so, pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

o If your car is equipped with an automatictransaxle, don't let your car creep forward.To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot onthe brake pedal when the car is stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Engagethe parking brake and place the gear selec-tor lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or in firstor reverse gear (manual transaxle). If yourcar is facing downhill, turn the front wheelsinto the curb to help keep the car from rolling.If your car is facing uphill, turn the frontwheels away from the curb to help keep thecar from rolling. If there is no curb or if it isrequired by other conditions to keep the carfrom rolling, block the wheels.

o Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. This ismost likely to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or ice around or nearthe rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. Ifthere is a risk that the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily while you putthe gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) orin first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)and block the rear wheels so the car cannotroll. Then release the parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade withthe accelerator pedal. This can cause thetransmission to overheat. Always use thebrake pedal or parking brake.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM13


14

o Remember, your Hyundai does not requireextended warm-up. As soon as the engineis running smoothly, you can drive away. Invery cold weather, however, give your en-gine a slightly longer warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Luggingis driving too slowly in too high a gear result-ing in the engine bucking. If this happens,shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit. This can beavoided by shifting at the recommendedspeeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The airconditioning system is operated by enginepower so your fuel economy is reducedwhen you use it.

o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-rectly. Improper alignment can result fromhitting curbs or driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tirewear and may also result in other problemsas well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For betterfuel economy and reduced maintenancecosts, maintain your car in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in Section 5. Ifyou drive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required (seeSection 5 for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,your Hyundai should be kept clean and freeof corrosive materials. It is especially impor-tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed toaccumulate on the underside of the car. Thisextra weight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to corro-sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),turn off your engine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

C140A01A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from yourcar if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderaterate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stoplights. Try toadjust your speed to that of the other trafficso you don't have to change speeds unnec-essarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unneces-sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster youdrive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving ata moderate speed, especially on the high-way, is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption and alsoincrease wear on these components. Inaddition, driving with your foot resting on thebrake pedal may cause the brakes to over-heat, which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious consequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflatedto the recommended pressure. Incorrectinflation, either too much or too little, resultsin unnecessary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM14


15

2SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally, cornersshould always be taken under gentle accelera-tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wearwill be held to a minimum.

WINTER DRIVING

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winterresult in greater wear and other problems. Tominimize the problems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may benecessary to use snow tires or to install tirechains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,it is necessary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type to the original equipment tires. Failureto do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your car. Speeding, rapid accelera-tion, sudden brake applications, and sharpturns are potentially very hazardous practices.During deceleration, use engine braking to thefullest extent. Sudden brake applications onsnowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.You need to keep sufficient distance betweenthe vehicle in front and your vehicle. Also, applythe brake gently. It should be noted that installingtire chains on the tire will provide a greaterdriving force, but will not prevent side skids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states. Checkstate laws before fitting tire chains.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene GlycolCoolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. Itis the only type of coolant that should be usedbecause it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the water pump andprevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replen-ish your coolant in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assure that itsfreezing point is sufficient for the temperaturesanticipated during the winter.

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the batterysystem. Visually inspect the battery and cablesas described in Section 6. The level of chargein your battery can be checked by your Hyundaidealer or a service station.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM15


16

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can buildup under the fenders and interfere with thesteering. When driving in severe winter condi-tions where this may happen, you should peri-odically check underneath the car to be sure themovement of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather whereyou drive your car, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washer systemfrom freezing, add an approved window washeranti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from Hyundai dealers andmost auto parts outlets. Do not use enginecoolant or other types of anti-freeze as thesemay damage the paint finish.

C160I01A-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake canfreeze in the engaged position. This is mostlikely to happen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near the rear brakesor if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk theparking brake may freeze, apply it only tempo-rarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manualtransaxle) and block the rear wheels so the carcannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if Neces-sary

In some climates it is recommended that a lowerviscosity "winter weight" oil be used during coldweather. See Section 9 for recommendations.If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use,consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and Ignition System

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-tion 6 and replace them if necessary. Alsocheck all ignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn or damaged inany way.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the keyopening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Ifthe lock is frozen internally, you may be able tothaw it out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM16


17

2

C170A01A-AAT

HIGHER SPEED MOTORINGPre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result inoverheating and possible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires which mayresult in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel thanurban motoring. Do not forget to check bothengine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may result inoverheating of the engine.

C180A01A-AAT

USE OF LIGHTS

Check your lights regularly for correct opera-tion and always keep them clean. When drivingduring the day in conditions of poor visibility, itis helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.This enables you to be seen as well as to see.

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

C190A02S-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car, youshould first check with your State's Departmentof Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-quirements.Since laws vary from State to State, the require-ments for towing trailers, cars, other types ofvehicles, or apparatus may differ. Ask yourHyundai dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your car duringits first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order toallow the engine to properly break in. Fail-ure to heed this caution may result in seri-ous engine or transaxle damage.

!

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination,making sure that it's location is compatible withthat of the trailer or vehicle being towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distrib-utes the tongue load uniformly throughout thechassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the carand installed by a qualified technician. DO NOTUSE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARYINSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THATATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

C190C03S-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed andoperating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. See "Maintenance Un-der Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM17


18

C190E01L

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front. About 60% ofthe trailer load should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining 40% inthe rear.

2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). The total gross vehicle weight is thecombined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage, cargo,hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-tional equipment.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possiblethat your towing package does not ex-ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.Improper trailer loading and/or too muchluggage in the trunk can overload therear axle. Redistribute the load and checkthe axle weight again.

C190E03E-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailerload.Tongue load

Total trailer weighto Tongue loads can be increased or de-

creased by redistributing the load in thetrailer.This can be verified by checking the totalweight of the loaded trailer and then checkingthe load on the tongue.

Tongue load

x 100 = 10% (MAX)

Total trailer weight

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between your ve-hicle and the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail,the trailer or vehicle could wander dangerouslyacross other lanes of traffic and ultimately leavethe roadway. To eliminate this potentially dan-gerous situation, safety chains, attached be-tween your car and the trailer or towed vehicle,are required in most states.

! CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in

excess of 12%) pay close attention to theengine coolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not overheat. Ifthe needle of the coolant temperaturegauge moves across the dial towards"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon asit is safe to do so, and allow the engineto idle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine has cooledsufficiently.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM18


19

2

C190E02L

Gross Axle Weight Gross VehicleWeight

Tongue

200(90.7)

100(45.3)

Lbs. (kg)

Trailer

2000(907)

1000(453)

Maximum Towable Weight

With Brake

Without Brake

! CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-ues in the following chart.

! WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steeringand braking performance causing acrash which could cause serious injuryor death.

o Towing a trailer affects vehicle handlingand braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance when braking.

o Be careful when driving in slippery andwindy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and while driv-ing up and down hills.

o Do not exceed 45 mph or the postedtowing speed limit, whichever is lower.

C190F01S-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chainconnections as well as proper operation ofthe trailer running lights, brake lights, andturn signals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed. (Less than 60 mph)

3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalconditions.

4. To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not usefifth gear (manual transaxle) or overdrive(automatic transaxle).

5. Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressure of alltires on the trailer and your vehicle. Low tirepressure can seriously affect the handling.Also check the spare tire.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-fected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle, keepa constant speed and steer straight ahead.If there is too much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM19


20

!

8. When parking your car and trailer, especiallyon a hill, be sure to follow all the normalprecautions. Turn your front wheel into thecurb, set the parking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocksat each of the trailer's tires.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start yourvehicle and trailer moving, and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you checkyour electrical connection at the same time.

10. During your trip, occasionally check to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still work-ing.

11. Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration orsudden stops.

12. Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.13. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

14. When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshiftthe transaxle to a lower gear and reducespeed to reduce chances of engine over-loading and/or overheating.

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when towing,(the temperature gauge reads near the redzone), taking the following actions mayreduce or eliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral and idlethe engine at a higher speed.

15. If you have to stop while going uphill, do nothold the vehicle in place by pressing on theaccelerator. This can cause the automatictransaxle to overheat. Use the parkingbrake or footbrake.

NOTE:When towing check transaxle fluid morefrequently.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01JM-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

I030B01E

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM20


21

2

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit(1)Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds'' on yourvehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX pounds.

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(640 kg)

300 lbs

(140 kg)

1100 lbs

(500 kg)

Example 1

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (70 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage weight

(5)Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

A B C

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM21


22

C190F02JM C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(640 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(250 kg)

Example 2

Item

A

B

C

Description



172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Total

1400 lbs

(640 kg)

750 lbs

(350 kg)

650 lbs

(290 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



150 lbs (70 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

Example 3 Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle’s capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

A B C A B C

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM22


23

2

!

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on the left and rightsides of the centerline.

NOTE:o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight rat-ings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how muchcargo and installed equipment yourvehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-thing else – they move as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, the itemswill keep going and can cause an injuryif they strike the driver or a passenger.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle or the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle.

o Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or eitherthe maximum front or rear GAWR.If you do, parts on your vehiclecan break, and it can change theway your vehicle handles. Thiscould cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

C190G01JM-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The label shows the size of your originaltires and the inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of the ve-hicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01JM

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM23


24

!WARNING:

Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,inside the vehicle above the topsof the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

xdflhma-2.p65 2/5/2008, 2:08 PM24

If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6Changing A Flat Tire ..................................................... 3-6If Your Vehicle Must be Towed ................................... 3-11Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-13If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-13


33

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM1

32


D010B02E D010C01E

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

!

D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or TurnsOver Slowly

D010C02A-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but DoesNot Start

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result in acollision or cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, besure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be surethey are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims orgoes out when you operate the starter, thebattery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be surethey are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Seeinstructions for "Jump Starting".

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all

connectors at ignition, coils and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be disconnected orloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine compart-ment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assistance.

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM2

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3

HXDFL523

Dischargedbattery

Boosterbattery

JUMP STARTING

D010D01A-AAT

If the Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping astraight line. Move cautiously off the road toa safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle

will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

!

o If you should accidentally get acid on yourskin or in your eyes, immediately removeany contaminated clothing and flush the areawith clean water for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. If youmust be transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the affectedarea with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Donot smoke or allow a spark or an open flamein the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jumpstart must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attemptto use it for the jump start.

o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in anothervehicle, be sure the two vehicles are nottouching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in theexact location shown in the illustration. First,attach one clamp of the jumper cable to thepositive (+) post or cable of the dischargedbattery. Then attach the other end of thesame cable to the positive (+) post or cableof the booster battery.

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Ifthese instructions are not followed exactly,serious personal injury and damage to thevehicle may occur! If you are not sure howto follow this procedure, seek qualifiedassistance. Automobile batteries containsulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM3

34


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!

! WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hair,hands, and clothing away from movingparts such as the fan and drive belts toprevent injury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken orengine coolant is leaking out, stop the engineimmediately and call the nearest Hyundaidealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause seri-ous burns.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheat-ing, wait until the engine temperature hasreturned to normal. Then, if coolant has beenlost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir(page 6-8) to bring the fluid level in thereservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for fur-ther signs of overheating. If overheatinghappens again, call a Hyundai dealer forassistance.

D030A01A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loudpinging or knocking and the engine is probablytoo hot. If this happens and, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safeto do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-matic) or neutral (manual transaxle) and setthe parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the caror steam is coming out from the hood, stopthe engine. Do not open the hood until theengine coolant has stopped running or thesteaming has stopped. If there is no visibleloss of engine coolant and no steam, leavethe engine running and check to be sure theengine cooling fan is operating. If the fan isnot running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt ismissing. If it is not missing, check to see thatit is tight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for engine coolant leak-ing from the radiator, hoses or under the car.(If the air conditioning had been in use, it isnormal for cold water to be draining from itwhen you stop).

Next, using the other cable, attach oneclamp to the negative (-) post or cable of thebooster battery. Then attach the other endof that cable to a solid metal part of the engineof the vehicle with the discharged batteryaway from the battery. Do not connect thecable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with the boosterbattery and let it run for a few minutes. Thiswill help to assure that the booster battery isfully charged. During the jumping operation,run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery using the normal startingprocedure. After the engine starts, leave thejumper cables connected and let the enginerun at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for severalminutes.

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in thereverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery becamedischarged (because the lights were left on,etc.), have the charging system checked byyour Hyundai dealer.

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM4


5SPARE TIRE

!D040A01E-AAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE

The following instructions for the tem-porary spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon aspossible after installing the sparetire, and adjust to the specified pres-sure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintainedat the specified pressure while thetire is stored.

Spare Tire Pressure

CAUTION:Serious loss of engine coolant indicatesthere is a leak in the cooling system and thisshould be checked as soon as possible bya Hyundai dealer.

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

T125/70D(R)15

60 psi (420 kPa)

2. The spare tire should only be usedtemporarily and should be returnedto the luggage compartment as soonas the original tire can be repaired orreplaced.

3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

! CAUTION:o Do not use snow chains with your

temporary spare tire.o Do not use more than one tempo-

rary spare tire at a time.o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-

porary spare tire is installed.

4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-cifically designed for your car, itshould not be used on any othervehicle.

5. The temporary spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the temporary spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car componentsmay occur.

6. The temporary spare tire pressureshould be checked once a monthwhile the tire is stored.

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM5

36


CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D060A01A-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"(automatic) or reverse gear (manualtransaxle) and that the parking brake isset, then:

D060A01E

D050A01A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedaland let the car slow down while drivingstraight ahead. Do not apply the brakesimmediately or attempt to pull off theroad as this may cause a loss of control.When the vehicle has slowed to such aspeed that it is safe to do so, brakecarefully and pull off the road. Drive offthe road as far as possible and park onfirm, level ground. If you are on a dividedhighway, do not park in the median areabetween the two traffic lanes.

2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn onyour emergency hazard flashers, setthe parking brake and put thetransaxle in "P" (automatic) or "R"(manual transaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle. Be sure they all get out on theside of the car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire following the instruc-tions provided on the following pages.

D040B01A-AAT

Handling the Spare Tire

Remove the installation bolt to removethe spare tire. To replace the spare tirein its storage compartment, tighten thebolt firmly with your fingers until there isno more play in the spare tire.

HFC4014-A

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM6


7

D060B01E-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

Remove the spare tire and take out thejack and tool bag from the trunk.

NOTE:The jack is located beneath the lug-gage mat in the vehicle trunk.

HXD091-A

JackSpare tire

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the vehicle is raisedon the jack.

D060D02A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrenchso the handle is to the right as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pushdown on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

HXDFL061HXD4005

Flat tire

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM7

38


D060F03E-AAT

5. Raising the Vehicle

After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrench barinto the jack as shown in the drawing.To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nutwrench clockwise. As the jack beginsto raise the vehicle, double check thatit is properly positioned and will not slip.If the jack is on soft ground or sand,place a board, brick, flat stone or otherobject under the base of the jack tokeep it from sinking.

HFC4022

Wrench bar

Wheel nut wrench

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

D060W01E

Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

! WARNING:Do not get under the vehicle when itis supported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the vehicle could falland cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the vehiclewhile the jack is being used.

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM8


9

!

D060G02E

D060G03Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide the wheeloff the studs and lay it flat so it cannotroll away. To put the wheel on the hub,pick up the spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheel ontothem. If this is difficult, tip the wheelslightly and get the top hole in the wheellined up with the top stud. Then jigglethe wheel back and forth until the wheelcan be slid over the other studs.

D060G03E

WARNING:If the vehicle has been driven re-cently, some pieces may be very hot.Use caution.

WARNING:Wheel and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury.Before putting the wheel into place,be sure that there is nothing on thehub or wheel (such as mud, tar,gravel, etc.) that interferes with thewheel from fitting solidly against thehub. If there is, remove it. If there isnot good contact on the mountingsurface between the wheel and hub,the wheel nuts could loosen andcause the loss of a wheel. Loss of awheel may result in loss of control ofthe vehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

!

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM9

310


To reinstall the wheel cover, hold it onthe studs, put the wheel nuts on thestuds and tighten them finger tight. Thenuts should be installed with their smalldiameter ends directed inward. Jigglethe tire to be sure it is completelyseated, then tighten the nuts as muchas possible with your fingers again.

D060H02A-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

D060H02E

D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise. Then position the wrench as shownin the drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not standon the wrench handle or use an exten-sion pipe over the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.

HXDFL062

After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM10


11

D060J01E-AAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it untilit is correct. Always reinstall the valvecap after checking or adjusting tirepressure. If the cap is not replaced, airmay leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.

HXDFL4007

After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place inthe trunk and return the jack and toolsto their proper storage locations.

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be doneby your Hyundai dealer or a commercial towtruck service. This will help assure that yourvehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, profes-sionals are generally aware of local laws gov-erning towing. In any case, rather than riskdamage to your car, it is suggested that youshow this information to the tow truck operator.Be sure that a safety chain system is used andthat all local laws are observed.It is recommended that your vehicle be towedwith a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipmentwith all the wheels off the ground.

! CAUTION:o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed

incorrectly!o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.o When the engine will not start, be sure

the steering is unlocked by placing thekey in the "ACC" position.

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM11

312


D080A02E

CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care not to

cause damage to the bumper or under-body of the vehicle.

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.

D080B01O-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift typetruck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

!

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rearwheels on the ground, be sure the parkingbrake is released.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of the auto-matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"range on the dipstick, add fluid. If youcannot add fluid, a towing dolly must beused.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspensioncomponents are damaged or the vehicle isbeing towed with the front wheels on theground, use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

o Manual Transaxle:If you do not use a towing dolly, place theignition key in the "ACC" position and put thetransaxle in "N (Neutral)".

CAUTION:Do not tow with the key removed or in the"LOCK" position when towing from therear without a towing dolly.

!

dolly

B080B03E

1)

2)

3)

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM12


13

D080B02E

!

o Automatic Transaxle:Be sure to use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

CAUTION:

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle shouldnever be towed from the rear with the frontwheels on the ground. This can cause se-rious damage to the transaxle.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with all the wheels off the ground.

HXD370

EMERGENCY TOWING

!

D080D04A-AAT

For emergency towing when no commercialtow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,chain or strap to one of the towing hooks underthe front/rear of your vehicle. Do not attempt totow your vehicle in this manner on any unpavedsurface. This could result in serious damage toyour vehicle.Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,drive train, axles, steering or brakes are dam-aged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is inneutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engineoff) or in the "ON" position (with the enginerunning). A driver must be in the towed vehicleto steer it and operate the brakes.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of the auto-matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"range on the dipstick, add fluid. If youcannot add fluid, a towing dolly must beused.

CAUTION:If the car is being towed with all four wheelson the ground, it can be towed only from thefront. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral.Do not tow at speeds greater than 30 mph(50 km/h) and for more than 15 miles (25km). Be sure the steering is unlocked byplacing the key in the "ACC" position. Adriver must be in the towed vehicle tooperate the steering and brakes.

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM13

314


IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealerscan make you a new key if you have your keynumber.If you lock the keys inside your vehicle and youcannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealerscan use special tools to open the door for you.

xdflhma-3.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM14

CORROSION PREVENTION &APPEARANCE CARE

4Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

4

xdflhma-4.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM1

44 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 TO HELP PREVENT CORROSIONCORROSION PROTECTION

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from gettingstarted by observing the following:

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularlyexposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-tection is particularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals, ocean airand industrial pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on yourcar are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed toaccumulate underneath the car.

o Removal of paint or protective coatings bystones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapesand dents which leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai fromCorrosion

By using the most advanced design and con-struction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality,However, this is only part of the job. To achievelong-term corrosion resistance your Hyundaican deliver, the owner's cooperation and assis-tance is also required. E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-sion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-larly when temperatures are just above freez-ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material iskept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slowto dry and holds moisture in contact with thevehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, itcan still retain the moisture and promote corro-sion.High temperatures can also accelerate corro-sion of parts that are not properly ventilated sothe moisture can be dispersed. For all thesereasons, it is particularly important to keep yourcar clean and free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only to thevisible surfaces but particularly to the undersideof the car.

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keepyour car clean and free of corrosive materials.Attention to the underside of the car is particu-larly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area — whereroad salts are used, near the ocean, areaswith industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, youshould take extra care to prevent corrosion.In winter, hose off the underside of your carat least once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winter isover.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the components underthe fenders and other areas that are hiddenfrom view. Do a thorough job; just dampeningthe accumulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion rather thanprevent it. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective in removingaccumulated mud and corrosive materials.

xdflhma-4.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM2

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE 4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3WASHING AND WAXING

o When cleaning lower door panels, rockerpanels and frame members, be sure thatdrain holes are kept open so that moisturecan escape and not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats andcarpeting to cause corrosion. Check under themats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-ing materials or chemicals in the car.These should be carried only in proper contain-ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. Ifbare metal is showing through, the attention ofa qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly cor-rosive and may damage painted surfaces in justa few hours. Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. This creates a favorable environmentfor corrosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or drive it into thegarage when it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E030A01A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface is hotfrom being in the sun. Always wash your car inthe shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive andcan scratch the paint if it is not removed. Airpollution or acid rain may damage the paint andtrim through chemical action if pollutants areallowed to remain in contact with the surface. Ifyou live near the ocean or in an area where roadsalts or dust control chemicals are used, youshould pay particular attention to the undersideof the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dustand loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driventhrough mud or muddy water, be sure to thor-oughly clean the underside as well. Use a harddirect stream of water to remove accumulatedmud or corrosive materials. Use a good qualitycar-washing solution and follow themanufacturer's directions on the package.These are available at your Hyundai dealer orauto parts outlet. Don't use strong householddetergents, gasoline, strong solvents or abra-sive cleaning powders as these may damagethe finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequentlyand don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.For stubborn spots, dampen them frequentlyand remove them a little at a time.

xdflhma-4.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM3

44 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

4

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polishingor waxing or using a combination cleaner andwax. Use a good quality commercial productand follow the manufacturer's directions on thecontainer. Polish and wax the bright trim piecesas well as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-sive cleaning agents. These can damage thefinish of the car. To remove road tar, useturpentine on a clean, soft cloth or commerciallyavailable bug and tar remover. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warmwater and mild soap or car-washing solution.Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lostits luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mildsoap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces bycleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-num is subject to corrosion, be sure to givealuminum alloy wheels special attention in win-ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean thewheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. Ifsoapy water dries on the finish, streaking willresult.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low,you may find it necessary to rinse each sectionimmediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamoisor soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for dryingthe car is to remove water from the car so it willdry without water spots. Don't rub, this candamage the finish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,use touch-up paint to cover them to preventcorrosion. To protect the paintwork of the caragainst corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai(at least once a month). Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of the splashboardsof the car. Make sure that the outlets and theunderside of the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulation of tar,industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects andbird droppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough to remove theaccumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washingto remove the solution. Never allow the solutionto dry on the painted surfaces.

xdflhma-4.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM4

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE 4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

5CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners ofthis type are available in aerosol cans in liquidform or powder. Read the instructions andfollow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleanerwith the appropriate attachment, remove asmuch dirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer's direc-tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not addwater. These cleaners work best when thecarpet is kept as dry as possible.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loosedirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then applya solution of mild soap or detergent and waterusing a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipewith a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-ers.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to pre-serve the appearance of the bumpers on yourHyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte orhydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If youdo, wash it off immediately with clear water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-faces. They are made of soft plastic and thesurface can be damaged if mistreated. Donot use abrasive cleaners. Use warm waterand mild soap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you have your carrepainted, do not leave the bumpers on thecar if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car again whenwater no longer beads on a clean surface butspreads out over a larger area.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner onthe windows. However, when cleaning the in-side of the rear window be careful not to damagethe rear window defroster wiring.

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or spongewith mild soap or detergent and warm water. Donot use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-sive materials on the seat belts as this mayweaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs ofdamage and replace them if necessary.

E050A01A-AAT

Any Questions?

If you have any questions about the care of yourcar, consult your Hyundai dealer.

xdflhma-4.p65 2/5/2008, 2:10 PM5

Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5 5

xdflhma-5.p65 2/5/2008, 2:11 PM1

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

F010D01A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should per-form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill thefuel tank. A list of these items will be found onpage 6-3.

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspections,adjustments and replacements that are listed inthe maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.These procedures must be performed at theintervals shown in the maintenance schedule toassure that your warranty remains in effect.Although it is strongly recommended that theybe performed by the trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures may be per-formed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai serviceparts be used for any required repairs or re-placements. Other parts of equivalent qualitysuch as engine oil, engine coolant, manual orauto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on whichare not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company orits distributor may be used without affectingyour warranty coverage but you should alwaysbe sure these are equivalent to the quality of theoriginal Hyundai parts. Your Owner's Hand-book provides further information about yourwarranty coverage.

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatest numberof miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,certain maintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design and engineer-ing have reduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these mainte-nance procedures performed to comply withthe terms of the warranties covering your newHyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied withyour new vehicle provides further informationabout these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundaican be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few toolsthat are required and want to take the time to doso, you can inspect and service a number ofitems. For more information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.

xdflhma-5.p65 2/5/2008, 2:11 PM2

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3

F020A02S-AAT

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS

o Inspection should be performed any time amalfunction is experienced or suspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained to demonstratecompliance with conditions of the emissionssystem warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000km), continue to follow the prescribed main-tenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance requi-rements, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,keep copies of the service records in yourglove box. This will help assure you candocument the required procedures beingperformed to keep your warranties in effect.This is especially important when service isnot performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o If you choose to do your own maintenanceand repairs, you may find it helpful to havean official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy ofthis publication may be purchased at yourHyundai dealer's parts department.

xdflhma-5.p65 2/5/2008, 2:11 PM3


4

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

INSULATOR OF FUEL INJECTOR (2.0 L SULEV Only)

VACUUM AND CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

FUEL TANK AIRFILTER

SPARK PLUGS

SPARK PLUG CABLE (2.0 L SULEV Only)

VALVE CLEARANCE

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B06E-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

F030A02A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission servicesto protect your emission warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

R

15

24

12

R

I

22.5

36

18

R

30

48

24

R

I

I*1

I

R

R

37.5

60

30

R

45

72

36

R

I

52.5

84

42

R

R

I

60

96

48

R

I

R

I

R

R

R

I

67.5

108

54

R

75

120

60

R

I

82.5

132

66

R

90

144

72

R

I

I*1

I

R

R

97.5

156

78

R

105

168

84

R

R

I

I

112.5

180

90

R

120

192

96

R

I

R

I

R

R

R

I

127.5

204

102

R

135

216

108

R

I

142.5

228

114

R

150

240

120

R

I

I*1

I

R

R

PLATINUM COATED (2.0L CVVT)

IRIDIUM COATED (2.0L SULEV) See Note *2

See Note *3

Note : *1 - IN CASE OF REMOVING INJECTOR FOR INSPECTION, IF AN INJECTOR IS REMOVED FOR INSPECTION, THE INSULATOR AND O-RING OF THE INJECTORSHOULD BE REPLACED WITH NEW PARTS.

*2 - REPLACE EVERY 100,000 MILES (160,000 KM) OR 10 YEARS.*3 - INSPECT EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR 5 YEARS AND REPLACE IF NECESSARY.

xdflhma-5.p65 2/5/2008, 2:11 PM4


5

Note : *1 - AFTER 105,000 MILES (168,000 KM) OR 84 MONTHS, INSPECT EVERY 15,000 MILES (24,000 KM) OR 12 MONTHS.*2 - FOR EVERY 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM) OR 12 MONTHS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST: R

F030C06E-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

See Note *2

See Note *1

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

DESCRIPTION

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (WATER PUMP, ALTERNATOR AND A/CON)

COOLANT

TIMING BELT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

CYLINDER HEAD COVER GASKET (2.0L SULEV Only)

OIL PAN LIQUID GASKET (2.0L SULEV Only)

IN-MANI GASKET (2.0L SULEV Only)

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)

THERMOSTAT

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

30

48

24

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

60

96

48

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

75

120

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

90

144

72

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

120

192

96

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

150

240

120

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

See Note *1

See Note *1

xdflhma-5.p65 2/5/2008, 2:11 PM5


6

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 5miles(8km) innormal temperature or less than 10miles(16km) in freezingtemperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-

spread roads

F040A04E-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriatemaintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in verycold weather

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F(32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH(170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS,

PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR RACK, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G

C, D, E, F

A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

xdflhma-5.p65 2/5/2008, 2:11 PM6


7EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, CrankcaseVentilation Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence ofheat and/or mechanical damage. Hard andbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions,and excessive swelling indicate deterioration.Particular attention should be paid to examinethose hose surfaces nearest to high heatsources, such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heatsource, sharp edges or moving componentwhich might cause heat damage or mechanicalwear. Inspect all hose connections, such asclamps and couplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are present. Hosesshould be replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

F060D01TB-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses andConnections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Replace anydamaged or leaking parts immediately.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance sched-ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions, more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which thevehicle may be driven, damage the emissionsystem and cause hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumulates inthe fuel tank, the filter may require replacementmore frequently.After installing a new filter, run the engine forseveral minutes, and check for leaks at theconnections. Fuel filters should be installed bytrained technicians.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should beinspected at those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-placed.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or enginevibration and adjust if necessary. A qualifiedtechnician should perform the operation.

xdflhma-5.p65 2/5/2008, 2:11 PM7


8

F060E01A-AAT

o Timing Belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt fordamage and deformation. Replace any dam-aged parts immediately.

F070D01A-AAT

o Manual Transaxle oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according tothe maintenance schedule.

NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possible leaksbefore adding oil. Do not overfill.

F070E07A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the "HOT" range ofthe dipstick, after the engine and transaxle areat normal operating temperature. Check theautomatic transaxle fluid level with the enginerunning and the transaxle in neutral, with theparking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SKATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP IIIspecifiction approved by Hyundai Motor Co.when adding or changing fluid. Using the wrongATF may result in damage to the ATM.

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir. The level should be between "MIN" and"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Useonly hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3or DOT 4.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing,cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replaceany deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums/Linings,Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drums and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brakesystem including the parking brake lever andcables. For detailed service procedures, referto the Shop Manual.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs forrun out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler andhangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.Start the engine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.

F060B01A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation andreplace if necessary. Drive belts should bechecked periodically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

F070C01A-AAT

o Engine Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervalsspecified in the maintenance schedule.

xdflhma-5.p65 2/5/2008, 2:11 PM8


9

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for loose-ness or damage. Retighten to the specifiedtorque.

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/Lower arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, checkfor excessive free-play in the steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage. Checkthe dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,cracks, or damage. Replace any damagedparts.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses forleakage and damage. Replace any damaged orleaking parts immediately. Inspect the powersteering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, ex-cessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.Replace or adjust it if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Driveshafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps forcracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace anydamaged parts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Check air con-ditioning performance according to the relevantshop manual if necessary.

F070R01E-AAT

o Cylinder Head Cover Gasket(2.0L SULEV Only)

NOTE:Check the contact surface between thecylinder head cover and head for oil leaksand replace the gasket with a new one, ifnecessary.Remove the upper timing belt cover andcheck the engine parts including the camcap for oil leaks.

F070S01E-AAT

o Oil Pan Liquid Gasket(2.0L SULEV Only)

NOTE:Check the oil mounted surface for oil leaks.If the oil pan has been removed, apply a newgasket before reinstalling the oil pan.

xdflhma-5.p65 2/5/2008, 2:11 PM9

Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-3Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-4Changing the Oil and Filter ............................................ 6-5Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-6Spark Plugs .................................................................. 6-9Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-11Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-12Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-13Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-15Checking the Clutch Fluid ........................................... 6-16Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-17Changing The Air Conditioner Filter ............................ 6-18Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-20Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-20Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-22Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-23Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-25Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-33Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-34

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6 6

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM1

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010A02E-GAT

(2.0L CVVT/SULEV)

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake booster4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed)6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap7. Engine coolant reservoir8. Engine oil level dipstick9. Radiator cap

10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick11. Air cleaner filter12. Battery13. Relay box

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing theengine, you should handle toolsand other heavy objects carefully sothat the plastic cover of the engineis not damaged.

!

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5

G010A02E

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM2

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3GENERAL CHECKS

G020C01A-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked each timewhen the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation (and air

conditioning, If installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking brakeo Manual transaxle operation, including clutch

operationo Automatic transaxle operation, including

"PARK" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioning incor-rectly, inspect it carefully and seek assistancefrom your Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition (including spare

tire)

G020A02A-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Clutch fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter condition

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM3


4 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performance andservice of the engine. It is suggested that youcheck the oil level at least once a week in normaluse and more often if you are on a trip or drivingin severe conditions.

G030C02JM-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

Before checking the oil, warm up the engine tothe normal operating temperature and be sureyour vehicle is parked on level ground. Turn theengine off.Wait a minute, then remove the dipstick, wipe itoff, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw itagain. Then note the highest level the oil hasreached on the dipstick. It should be betweenthe upper ("F") and lower ("L") range.

G030C01E-A

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

The engine oil quality should meet the followingclassification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

G030B01JM-U

NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W-

30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferredregardless of regional option and en-gine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil isnot available, secondary recommendedengine oil for corresponding tempera-ture range can be used.

! WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM4


5

HXDFL009

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark,add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do notoverfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks isequal to about 1 quart of oil.

G030D01O-AAT

Adding Oil ! CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil into afunnel. Do not overfill not to damage en-gine.

! WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

G040A03E-AAT

The engine oil and filter should be changed atthose intervals specified in the maintenanceschedule in Section 5. If the vehicle is beingdriven in severe conditions, more frequent oiland filter changes are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter isas follows:

1. Park the vehicle on level ground and set theparking brake. Start the engine and let itwarm up until the needle on the coolanttemperature gauge moves above the lowestmark. Turn the engine off and place the gearselector lever in "P" (automatic) or reversegear (manual transaxle). Set the parkingbrake.

G040A03E

Oil filler cap

Drain plugOil filler

CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM5


6

!

!

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with theinstructions on the carton or on the filter itself.Do not over-tighten.

Oil filter tightening torque :1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m

Be sure that the mounting surface on theengine is clean and that the old gasket isremoved completely. Lubricate the newgasket on the filter with clean engine oilbefore installation.

7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended

engine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-ter 9 for engine oil capacity.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact with theskin for prolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-ways protect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap and warmwater as soon as possible after handlingused oil.

9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oilis leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.

10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil into afunnel. Do not overfill! Engine damage mayoccur if overfilled.

NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. It issuggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service station forreclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it into the household trash.

!

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oilfiller cap.

3. Slide underneath the car and loosen thedrain plug by turning it counterclockwise witha wrench of the proper size. Be sure that adrain pan is in position to catch the oil as itdrains out, then remove the drain plug.

WARNING:Be very careful when draining the engine oilas it may be hot enough to burn you!

4. When the oil has stopped draining, replacethe drain plug using a new gasket and re-tighten by turning it clockwise.

Drain plug tightening torque:4.0 ~ 4.5 kgf.m

5. Remove the oil filter. You should be able tounscrew the filter with your hands. (If yourhands are slippery, try to use a cloth be-tween your hands and the filter to giveyourself a better grip.) A certain amount of oilwill come out when you remove the filter, sobe sure to have your drain pan in placeunderneath it.

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM6


7CHECKING AND CHANGING THEENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure and mayerupt through the opening if the cap isremoved. You could be seriously burned ifyou do not observe this precaution. Do notremove the radiator cap until the radiator iscool to the touch.

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant shouldbe compatible with aluminum engine parts.Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentration andtype of engine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentration ofantifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go belowthe 35% level, or damage to the cooling systemmay result. For proper concentration whenadding or replacing the engine coolant, refer tothe following table.

G050B01E

Ambient

temperature

°F (°C)

-5 (15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM7


8

G050D03A-AAT

To Change the Engine Coolant

The engine coolant should be changed at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

CAUTION:Engine coolant can damage the finish ofyour car. If you spill engine coolant on thecar, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.

1. Park the car on level ground, set the park-ing brake and remove the radiator cap whencool.

2. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow allthe engine coolant to drain from the coolingsystem, then securely close the drain cock.

3. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then, followingthe manufacturer's directions on the enginecoolant container, add the appropriate quan-tity of coolant to the radiator.

!

4. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise with-out pressing down on it, until it stops. Thisrelieves any pressure remaining in the cool-ing system. And remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turning counterclock-wise.Now fill the radiator with clean demineralizedor distilled water. Continue to add cleandemineralized or distilled water in small quan-tities until the fluid level stays up in theradiator neck.

G050D03E

G050D01E

G050C01A-AAT

To Check the Coolant Level

The coolant level can be seen on the side of theplastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines onthe reservoir when the engine is cold. If the levelis below the "L" mark, add engine coolant tobring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluidlevel frequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

! WARNING:Remove the radiator cap when the radiatoris cool.

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM8


9

G050D04E

5. Start the engine, top off the radiator with waterand then add engine coolant to the reservoiruntil the level is between "L" and "F".

6. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps andcheck to be sure the drain cocks are fullyclosed and not leaking.

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

SPARK PLUGS

G060B02E-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

The spark plugs should be changed at theintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5 or whenever engineperformance indicates they should be changed.Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug perfor-mance include engine misfiring under load, lossof fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. Whenspark plugs are replaced, always use sparkplugs recommended by Hyundai. The use ofother spark plugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or engine damage.

NOTE:o When replacing the spark plugs, genu-

ine Hyundai replacement parts are rec-ommended.

o It is recommended that spark plugs bechanged by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

Recommended Spark Plugs:

* 2.0L SULEV Only.

CHAMPION

NGK

RC10PYP4

PFR5N-11

IFR5G-11

PLATINUM

PLATINUM

IRIDIUM*

G060A02E-AAT

Your engine was originally equipped with plati-num or iridium-tipped spark plugs.Platinum or iridium-tipped spark plugs will lastlonger than conventional type spark plugs andcan be identified by blue lines (platinum only) onthe ceramic shell.

NOTE:Do not clean or regap platinum or iridium-tipped spark plugs.

G060A01L

0.039~0.043 in.(1.0~1.1 mm)

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM9


10

G060C01S-AAT

Changing the Spark Plugs

You will find it easier to change spark plugs if theengine is cold. Always change one spark plugat a time. This helps avoid getting the wiresmixed up.

1. Remove the center cover on the enginerocker cover.

2. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt that hasaccumulated around the spark plug so itcannot fall into the cylinder when the sparkplug is removed.

3. To remove the spark plug cable, pull straightup on the insulated connector, not the cable.Pulling on the cable may damage the carboncore conductor.

HGK256

! WARNING:It is recommended that the engine be coolor cold when changing the spark plugs. Ifthe engine is hot, you could burn yourselfon the insulated connector, the spark plugor the engine itself.

4. When preparing to remove the spark plug,guide the socket down over the spark plug,being careful not to damage the ceramicinsulator.

5. To remove the spark plug, turn the wrenchhandle in a counterclockwise direction.

6. To replace the new spark plug, guide thesocket down over the spark plug, beingcareful not to damage the ceramic insulator.

NOTE:Spark plugs should be tightened firmly.Over-tightening can damage the threads inthe aluminum cylinder head. Leaving themtoo loose can cause the spark plugs to getvery hot and possibly result in damage tothe engine.

7. Replace the cable by pushing the insulatedconnector directly down onto the electrode.Check to be sure it has snapped into placeand can't fall off.

HGK257 HGK258

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM10


11WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

! CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.

This can result in more rapid wear of thewiper blades and may scratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contactwith petroleum products such as engineoil, gasoline, etc.

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully inspectedfrom time to time and cleaned to remove accu-mulations of road film or other debris. To cleanthe wiper blades and arms, use a clean spongeor cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with Genuine HyundaiReplacement Parts or their equivalent.

HEF119

CHANGING THE AIR CLEANERFILTER

G070A01E-AAT

To change the filter, unsnap the clips around thecover. When this is done, the cover can be liftedoff, the old filter removed and the new filter putin its place. Genuine Hyundai ReplacementParts are recommended.

HXDFL011

! CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without a proper

air filter in place can result in excessiveengine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter, becareful that dust or dirt does not enterthe air intake. These may result in dam-age to the air cleaner filter.

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM11


12 FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR

G090A02A-AAT

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to thewindshield washer systems.A good quality washer fluid should be used to fillthe washer reservoir. The fluid level should bechecked more frequently during inclementweather or whenever the washer system is inmore frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2 U.S.quarts (3.0 Liters).

G090A01E-A

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL

CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer systembecause it will damage the car's finish.

o The washer should not be operated ifthe washer reservoir is empty. This candamage the washer fluid pump.

!G100A04A-AAT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxleshould be checked at those intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section5.

Recommended Oil

Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF75W/85 (API GL-4) or equivalent in the manualtransaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity

The oil capacity of the manual transaxle is 2.27U.S. quarts (2.15 liters).

G100A01A

Drain plugFiller plug! WARNING:o Windshield washer fluid agents contain

some amounts of alcohol and can beflammable under certain circumstances.Do not allow sparks or flame to contactthe washer fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicle or itsoccupants could occur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous tohumans and animals. Do not drink wind-shield washer fluid. Serious injury ordeath could occur.

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM12


13

G110A02E-AAT

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle shouldbe changed at those intervals specified in thevehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is a red in color.As driving distance increases, the fluidcolor turns darkish red gradually. It is anormal condition and you should not judgethe need to replace based upon the chang-ing color.You must replace the automatic transaxlefluid in accordance with intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule insection 5.

G100B02A-AAT

To Check the Manual TransaxleFluid Level

Park the car on level ground with the engine off.

1. Using a wrench of the correct size, loosenthe oil filler plug by turning it counterclock-wise and remove it with your fingers.

2. Use your finger or suitable tool to feel insidethe hole. The oil level should be at its bottomedge. If it is not, check for leaks beforeadding oil. To refill the transaxle or bring theoil level up,add oil slowly until it reaches theproper level. Do not overfill.

3. Replace the plug and washer, screw it in withyour fingers and then tighten securely withthe wrench.

G100B01L

! WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxle oillevel when the engine is cool or cold. If theengine is hot, you should exercise greatcaution to avoid burning yourself on hotengine or exhaust parts.

G110B05A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is speciallydesigned to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINEATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SPIII or other brands meeting the SP III specifica-tion approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damagecaused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered byyour new vehicle limited warranty.

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM13


14

!

G110C01E-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is8.2 U.S. quarts (7.8 liters).

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should be checkedwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature. This means that the engine,radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot.Exercise great care not to burn yourselfduring this procedure.

G110D03A-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

Park the car on level ground with the parkingbrake engaged. When the transaxle fluid levelis checked, the transaxle fluid should be atnormal operating temperature and the engineidling.

C090A01E-MWhile the engine is idling, apply the brakes andmove the gear selector lever from "P" to eachof its other positions -- "R", "N", "D","3", "2", "L"-- and then return to "N" or "P" with the enginestill idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,hair and clothing clear of any moving parts.

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean,reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, thenremove it again. Now check the fluid level onthe dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" rangeon the dipstick.

G110D01E

! CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives may causedamage to the automatic transaxle. Onlyuse HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIA-MOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or otherbrands meeting the SP III specification ap-proved by Hyundai Motor Co.. If you arehaving your vehicle serviced at a facilityother than a Hyundai dealer, verify ATF isused for your vehicle.

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM14


15CHECKING THE BRAKES

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

!

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your brakingsystem. Follow the instructions printed on thecontainer.

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to the safeoperation of the car, it is suggested thatthey be checked and inspected by yourHyundai dealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets into youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle'spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

!

!

3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnelto add transaxle fluid through the dipsticktube until the level reaches the "HOT" range.Do not overfill.

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by the enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

HKSOM120

Fluid level should be within this range

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir shouldbe checked periodically. The level should bebetween the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at or below the"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to"MAX". Do not overfill.

HXDFL012

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM15


16

!

G130B02A-AAT

To Replace the Fluid

Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT 4 specification should be used. Thereservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoidcontamination from foreign matter or moisture.

NOTE:Do not allow any other liquids to contami-nate the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if you get it in youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle'spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

!

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damageyour vision if it gets into your eyes. Use onlyDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from asealed container. Do not allow the fluid canor reservoir to remain open any longer thanrequired. This will prevent entry of dirt andmoisture which can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper operation.

CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

G130A01S-AAT

To Check the Clutch Fluid

The clutch fluid level in the master cylindershould be checked when performing other un-der hood services. The system should bechecked for leakage at the same time.Check to make certain that the clutch fluid levelis always between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required.Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch systemwhich should be inspected and repaired imme-diately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt thenunscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour therecommended fluid into the reservoir. Do notoverfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-voir and tighten.

HXDFL013

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM16


17AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engineradiator) should be checked periodically foraccumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-ficiency. When removing such accumulations,brush or hose them away carefully to avoidbending the cooling fans.

!

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in thesystem, the air conditioning should be run for atleast 10 minutes each week. This is particularlyimportant during cool weather when the airconditioning system is not otherwise in use.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air ConditioningOperation

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle forseveral minutes with the air conditioning setat the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents isnot cold, have the air conditioning systeminspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low refrig-erant level may damage the compressor.

CRANK PULLEY G140D01A

A/C

TENSION PULLEY

When the air conditioning is being used regu-larly, the compressor drive belt tension shouldbe checked at least once a month with theengine turned off.To check the drive belt tension, press down onthe belt halfway between the engine crankshaftand compressor pulleys. Pressing with yourfinger, you should not be able to deflect this beltanymore than 1/3 of an inch. If you have theinstruments to check it, with a force of 22 lb.(98N), the deflection should be 0.315 inches(approx 8.0 mm). If the belt is too loose, have itadjusted by your Hyundai dealer.

G140D01A-AAT

Checking the Compressor Drive Belt

0.315 in. (8 mm)

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM17


18

5. Replace the air conditioner filter with a newone.

6. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-bly.

!

4. Remove the filter cover by pushing the twohooks of the filter cover.

CAUTION:Be sure to install the air conditioner filter inthe direction of the arrow sign. Otherwise,noise or filter damage may result.

HXD2099

CHANGING THE AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

HXD2096

B140E02E-AAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)(If installed)

The air conditioner filter is located in front of theevaporator unit behind the glove box.It helps to decrease pollutants from entering thecar.

2. Remove the protective padding from themounting bracket.

3. Remove the mounting bolts with the socketwrench, and then detach the mounting bracket.

1. Open the glove box and remove the adjust-ing pins on both sides of the glove box.

HXD2097

HXD2098

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM18


19

G150A02E

CHECKING THE FREEPLAY

G160A01A-AAT

Clutch Pedal Free Play

With the engine off, press lightly on the clutchpedal until you feel a change in resistance. Thisis the clutch pedal free-play. The free-playshould be within the limits specified in the illus-tration. If it is not, have it inspected by yourHyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired ifnecessary.

G160A01E

0.24 ~ 0.51 in.(6 ~ 13 mm)

G150A01A-AAT

Steering wheel

To check the steering wheel free-play, stop thecar with the wheels pointed straight ahead andgently move the steering wheel back and forth.Use very light finger pressure and be sensitiveto changes in resistance that mark the limits ofthe free-play. If the free-play is greater thanspecified, have it inspected by your Hyundaidealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

1.18 in.(30 mm)

G170A01A-AAT

Brake Pedal Free Play

With the engine off, press down on the brakepedal several times to reduce the vacuum in thebrake booster.Then, using your hand, press down slowly onthe brake pedal until you feel a change inresistance. This is the brake pedal freeplay.The freeplay should be within the limits specifiedin the illustration. If it is not, have it inspected byyour Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired ifnecessary.

HXGS508

0.12 ~ 0.31 in.(3 ~ 8 mm)

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:13 PM19


20 CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

G200A03A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits fromthe battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (Thiscould be caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,repair the system and replace the fusible link.The fusible links are located in a relay box in theengine compartment for easy inspection.

GoodOpen-Replace

G200A01E

HTB186

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G180A01A-AAT

Checking Brake Pedal Clearance

You need a helper to check the brake pedalclearance. With the engine running, have yourhelper press down on the brake pedal severaltimes and then hold it down with a force of about110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-ance is the distance from the top surface of thebrake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under thefloor mat.If the brake pedal clearance is not within thelimits specified in the illustration, have it in-spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

G180A01L

1.78 in.(45.1 mm)

Drive belts should be checked periodically forproper tension and adjusted if necessary. At thesame time, belts should be examined for cracks,wear, fraying or other evidence of deteriorationand replaced if necessary.Belt routing should also be checked to be surethere is no interference between the belts andother parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced,the new belt should be adjusted again after twoor three weeks to eliminate slack resulting frominitial stretching after use.

G190A01A-AAT

Water Pump Pulley

GeneratorPulley

Crankshaft Pulley

0.2 ~ 0.24 in.(5.1 ~ 6 mm)

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM20


21

!G200B02E-AAT

Replacing Accessory FusesCAUTION:

When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Never usea piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious damage andcreate a fire hazard.

The fuse box for the lights and other electricalaccessories will be found behind the storagebox located on the instrument panel to the leftside of the driver. On the backside of the multibox, you will find a list showing the circuitsprotected by each fuse.If any of your car's lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown fuse couldbe the reason. If the fuse has burned out, youwill see that the metal strip inside the fuse hasmelted through. If you suspect a blown fuse,follow this procedure:

HXDFL200

1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.

Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in thefuse box to simplify this operation).

3. Be sure to check all other fuses even if youfind one that appears to have opened.

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a newfuse of the same rating into place. The fuseshould be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuseclip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.If you do not have a spare fuse, you may beable to borrow a fuse of the same or lowerrating from an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always remember toreplace the borrowed fuse.

HXDFL1026-1

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM21


22

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out youreyes with water and get medical assistanceas soon as possible. While you are beingdriven to get medical assistance, continue torinse your eyes by using a sponge or softcloth saturated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milk ofmagnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetableoil. Get medical assistance as soon aspossible.

While batteries are being charged (either by abattery charger or by the vehicle's generator),they produce explosive gases. Always ob-serve these warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:o Charge batteries only in a well ventilated

area.o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking in

the area.o Keep children away from the area.

!!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When workingwith batteries, carefully observe the follow-ing precautions to avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strong solutionof sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highlycorrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself orthe car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,immediately do the following:

CAUTION:An open fuse indicates that there is a prob-lem in the electrical circuit. If you replace afuse and it blows as soon as the accessoryis turned on, the problem is serious andshould be referred to a Hyundai dealer fordiagnosis and repair. Never replace a fusewith anything except a fuse with the sameor a lower amperage rating. A higher capac-ity fuse could cause damage and create afire hazard.

NOTE:See page 6-34 for the fuse panel descrip-tions.

G200B02L

Good Open-Replace

CHECKING THE BATTERY

D010B02E

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM22


23CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLINGFANS

!

!

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on auto-matically if the engine coolant temperature ishigh.

G220A01A-AAT

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser cooling fan should come onautomatically whenever the air conditioning is inoperation.

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

G210B03A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-sion around the battery posts or terminalsshould be removed using a solution of house-hold baking soda and warm water. After thebattery terminals are dry, cover them with a lightcoating of grease.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the state of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the State of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.

POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

G230A03A-AAT

The power steering fluid level should be checkedregularly. To check the power steering fluidlevel, be sure the engine is "OFF", then checkto make certain that the power steering fluidlevel is between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately after theengine is started in extremely cold condi-tions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops duringwarm up, there is no abnormal function inthe system. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-tions.

G230A01E

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM23


24

!

5. Open the hood.6. Draw a vertical line (through the center of

each headlight beam pattern) and a horizon-tal line (through the center of each headlightbeam pattern) on the aiming screen.

And then, draw the horizontal parallel line at0.8 in. (21 mm) under the horizontal line.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to theparallel line with a phillips screwdriver- VERTICAL AIMING

WARNING:Horizontal aiming should be adjusted by anauthorized Hyundai Dealer.

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

G250A01A-AAT

FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUTYOUR HYUNDAI

If you desire additional information about main-taining and servicing your Hyundai, you maypurchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundaidealer's parts department. This is the samemanual used by dealership technicians andwhile it is highly technical it can be useful inobtaining a better understanding of your car andhow it works.

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the power steer-ing hose connections for fluid leakage at regularintervals. The power steering hoses should bereplaced if there is severe surface cracking,scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hosecould cause premature failure.

Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

G290A03E-AAT

Before performing aiming adjustment, makesure of the following.

1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press

the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-eral times. Place the vehicle at a distance of118 in. (3,000 mm) from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except forfull levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, andspare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driveror equivalent weight placed in driver's seat.

4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on theheadlights (Low beam).

VerticalAiming

G290A02E-A

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM24


25

Specification:

"H"Horizontal center line of headlights fromground.Low beam : 25.2 in. (639 mm)High beam : 23.3 in. (619 mm)

"W"Distance between each headlight center.Low beam : 44.2 in. (1124 mm)High beam : 33.0 in. (840 mm)

"L" Distance between the headlights and thewall that the lights are tested against.: 118 in. (3,000 mm).

G290B03E-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight AssemblyReplacement

If the vehicle has had front body repair and theheadlight assembly has been replaced, theheadlight aiming should be checked using anaiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turnon the headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)

1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light isparallel to the center line of the body and isaligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the centerof the headlights.

G290B01A-1

L

W

H

H

Cut-off line

"P"

1.18 in. (30mm) Vertical line

Horizontal line

Groundline

REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

G260A03A-AAT

Before attempting to replace a headlight bulb, besure the switch is turned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how to reach theheadlight bulbs so they may be changed. Besure to replace the burned-out bulb with one ofthe same number and wattage rating.

CAUTION:Keep the lamps out of contact with petro-leum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc.

!

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM25


26

7. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlightbulb.

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwiseand remove it.

HXDFL1011

HXDFL1010

4. Using a socket wrench of the correct size,remove the headlight assembly mounting bolts.

5. Disconnect the power cord from the back ofthe headlight.

Replacement instructions:

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,

avoid touching the glass.

G270A01A-AAT

HEADLIGHT AND FRONT TURN SIG-NAL LIGHT

G270A01E

High beam Low beam

Turn signal light

HXDFL1009

HXDFL1022

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM26


27

! WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas under pres-sure and if impacted could shatter, result-ing in flying fragments. Always wear eyeprotection when servicing the bulb. Protectthe bulb against abrasions or scratchesand against liquids when lighted. Turn thebulb on only when installing in a headlight.Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.Keep the bulb out of the reach of childrenand dispose of the used bulb with care.

8. Remove the protective cap from the re-placement bulb and install the new bulb bymatching the plastic base with the headlighthole. Retighten the bulb spring and recon-nect the power cord.

9. Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-ly dispose of the old bulb.

10. Check for proper headlight aim.

(1) High beam(2) Low beam(3) Front turn signal light

HXDFL1013-1

(1)(2)

(3)

G270A03O

G270D01E-AAT

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT(Stop / Tail Light, Back up light and RearTurn Signal Light)

4 Door

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Unscrew and remove the cover on the insideof the rear luggage trim.

HXDFL1014

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM27


28

HXDFL1017

3. To replace the rear combination light, re-move it from the bulb holder and install thenew bulb.

(2)

HXDFL335

3. Remove the mounting screws of the rearcombination light with a socket wrench.


(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Side marker light(3) Rear turn signal light(4) Back up light

5 Door (Luggage compartment)

1. Open the tail gate.

2. Remove the mounting screws of the rearcombination light with a flat blade screw-driver.

HXDFL1016-A

HXDFL1015

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

HXDFL334(1)

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM28


29

HXDFL333

HXDFL342

5 Door (Tail gate)


HXDFL332

2. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw-driver.

Back up light


Tail light

(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Rear turn signal light

G270C01L-GAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT4 Door

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the plastic cover with a flat bladescrewdriver.

HXDFL341A

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM29


30

HTB284

3. Disconnect the power cord.

4. Replace with a new bulb.

HXDFL343


HTB284


5Door


2. Remove the luggage compartment light coveron the right side package tray panel withpushing it.

HXDFL341B

HXDFL341

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM30


31

G270E01E-AAT

SIDE MARKER LIGHT

1. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw-driver.



HXDFL338

HXDFL339

HXDFL340

G270G01E-GAT

INTERIOR LIGHTRoom Light


HXDFL1020

Screwdriver

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:14 PM31


32

G270H01E-GAT

Map Light (If installed)


B460D02E-A

G270H01E-A


HXDFL1021


xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:15 PM32


33

Soket type

-

S8.5/8.5

S8.5/8.5

BA 15s

BAY 15d

BAY 15d

W2.1 x 9.5D

BA 15s

Soket type

P14,5s/PX 26d

P22d

BA15s

W2.1x9.5d

W2.1x9.5D

S8.5/8.5

W2.1x9.5d

BA 15s

BULB WATTAGE

G280A04E-AAT

2 3 6

7 8

G280A03E-A

(High beam)

(Low beam)

4 DOOR 5 DOOR

1

1

5 127

4

910

9

10 11

8

Wattage

55/55

51

27

5

10

10

5

Part Name

High Mounted Stop Light

Luggage Compartment Light

License Plate Light

Rear

Combination Light

Tail Light

Back-up Light

Part Name

Head Light (High/Low)

Front Fog Light

Front Turn Signal Light

Side Marker Light

Interior

Front Door Edge Warning Light

High Mounted Stop Light

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Wattage

5

5

27

27/8

8

Map Light

Room Light

No.

7

8

9

10

11

12

5 Door 2.6(LED)

Turn Signal Light

Stop/Tail Light

4 Door

5 Door

16

274 Door 16

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:15 PM33


34 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200B01E-AAT

Engine Compartment

G280B01E

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect thefuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

FUSERATING

120A50A20A20A20A40A30A30A30A15A10A15A20A15A10A15A15A15A

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

GeneratorFusible link (P/WDW), Tail lamp relay, Power connectorCondenser fan relay.1Radiator fan relayGenerator, Engine control relay, Fuel pump relay, PCMIgnition switch, Start relayABS control (Motor)ABS control (Solenoid)Blower relayInjectorsPCM, Heated oxygen sensor, SMATRA, Heater relay, Glow plug relayDRL controlHead lamp washerFront fog lamp relaySiren, PCMA/C relay, Horn relayHead lamp (Hight)Head lamp (Low)

BATTBATTCONDRADECUIGN

ABS.1ABS.2

BLOWERINJ.

SNSRDRL

H/LP WASHERF/FOGECU

HORN & A/CH/LP (HI)H/LP (LO)

FUSIBLELINK

FUSE

DESCRIPTION

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:15 PM34


35

G200D01E-GAT

Inner Panel

G280D01E

FUSERATING

10A10A15A10A

10A10A10A10A10A10A10A10A30A20A15A15A10A15A10A10A15A20A20A10A

15A

30A

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Turn signal lamps, Back-up lampPre-excitation resistor, Instrument cluster (IND)SRS controlHazard relay, Hazard lampsA/C ControlShort connector, Illumination lamps, Tail lamp (RH), Head lamp washerTail lamp (LH), Exterior lampsB/Alarm relayDigital clock, Power outside mirror & mirror folding, AudioCruise control, PCM, Vehicle speed sensor, Ignition coilABS controlInstrument cluster (Air bag IND)Defogger relayPower antennaPower door lock control, SunroofStop lamps, Power window, Power outside mirror foldingRear window & outside mirror defogger, A/C controlCigarette lighter, Power outletRear fog lampsHead lamp, Head lamp washer, Fuel filter heatingRear wiper & washerFront wiper & washerSeat warmerBlower & A/C control, ETACM, Sunroof controller, Electronic chrome mirrorDoor lamps, Instrument cluster, Data link connector, Multipurpose checkconnector, Room lamps, ETACM, Audio, Power connector

Power window

T/SIGCLUSTER

A/BAGHAZARDA/C SWTAIL-RHTAIL-LHSTARTAUDIOE C UA B S

A/BAG INDRR HTRA M P

S/ROOFSTOP

HTD MIRC/LIGHTRR FOG

I G NR/WIPERF/WIPER

S/HTRA/CON

ROOM LP

P/WINDOW

FUSE

FUSIBLELINK

DESCRIPTION

xdflhma-6.p65 2/5/2008, 2:15 PM35

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

7

xdflhma-7.p65 2/5/2008, 2:15 PM1

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control System

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controls exhaustemissions while maintaining good vehicleperformace.

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission ControlSystem

The Positive Crankcase Ventilation System isemployed to prevent air pollution caused byblow-by gases being emitted from the crank-case. This system supplies fresh filtered air tothe crankcase through the air intake hose.Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes withblow-by gases, which then pass through thePCV valve and into the induction system.

H010A01A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all requirements of theU.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-fornia Air Resources Board.There are three emission control systems whichare as follows.

1) Crankcase Emission Control System2) Evaporative Emission Control System3) Exhaust Emission Control System

In order to ensure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recommendedthat you have your car inspected and main-tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-cordance with the maintenance schedule in thismanual.

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank areabsorbed and stored in the onboard canister.When the engine is running, the fuel vaporsabsorbed in the canister are drawn into theinduction system through the purge controlsolenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlledby the Engine Control Module (ECM); when theengine coolant temperature is low during idling,the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is nottaken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens tointroduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control(Including ORVR: Onboard RefuelingVapor Recovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control System isdesigned to prevent fuel vapors from escapinginto the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allow thevapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into acanister while refueling at the gas station, pre-venting the escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)

xdflhma-7.p65 2/5/2008, 2:15 PM2

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3CATALYTIC CONVERTER

!! WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalytic con-verter temperatures can result from im-proper operation of the electrical, igni-tion or multiport electronic fuel injec-tion.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or ishard to start, have your Hyundai dealerinspect and repair the problem as soonas possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may cause theengine to misfire and result in damage tothe catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and cre-ate a fire hazard.

o Do not touch the catalytic converter orany other part of the exhaust systemwhile the catalytic converter is hot. Shutoff the engine, wait for at least one hourbefore touching the catalytic converteror any other part of the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundai dealer isyour best source of assistance.

H020A01S-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with one ortwo monolith type three-way catalytic convert-ers to reduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocar-bons and nitrogen oxides contained in the ex-haust gas. Exhaust gases passing through thecatalytic converter cause it to operate at a veryhigh temperature. The introduction of largeamounts of unburned gasoline into the exhaustmay cause the catalytic converter to overheatand create a fire hazard. This risk may bereduced by observing the following:

WARNING:o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-

bustible material such as grass, paper,leaves or rags. These materials mightcontact the hot catalytic converter and afire might result.

HXDFL1032

Catalytic Converter(Federal, California)

Catalytic Converter(California)

xdflhma-7.p65 2/5/2008, 2:15 PM3

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................... 8-3Checking Tire Inflation Pressure ................................... 8-4Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-5All Season Tires ............................................................ 8-7Summer Tires ............................................................... 8-7Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-8Tire Chains.................................................................... 8-8Tire Rotation.................................................................. 8-8Tire Balancing ............................................................... 8-9Tire Traction .................................................................. 8-9When to Replace Tires ................................................. 8-9Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-10Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-10Consumer Information ................................................. 8-10Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-13Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-13

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

88

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM1

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2

SSA8010B

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AAT

Engine NumberI010A01A-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is thenumber used in registering your car and in alllegal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. Itcan be found in three different places on yourcar:

1. On the bulkhead between the engine andpassenger compartments.

2. On the left top side of the instrument panelwhere it can be seen by looking down throughthe windshield.

3. On the lower side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The engine number is stamped on the engineblock as shown in the drawing.

HXDFL010-A

1 2

3

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufactur's bookletincluded with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM2

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

3

!I030A01JM-AAT

RECOMMENDED INFLATION PRES-SURES

Tire label located on the driver's side ofthe center pillar outer panel gives thecold tire pressures recommended foryour vehicle with the original tire size,the number of people that can be in yourvehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

HXDFL6002

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combinationof ride comfort, tire wear and stabilityunder normal conditions. Tire pressuresshould be checked at least monthly.Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

WARNING:o Lower-than-recommended tire

pressures cause uneven treadwear, poor handling, poor fueleconomy or tire failure.

o Higher-than-recommended tirepressures can cause poor han-dling, uneven tread wear or tirefailure.

I030A02E

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM3


4

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gauge. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gauge to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).

CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hoursor hasn't been driven more thanone mile or 1.6 km since startingup.)

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Never overload your vehicle. Beespecially careful about overload-ing if you equip your vehicle witha luggage rack.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

!

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM4


5

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamen-tal characteristics of the tire and alsoprovides the tire identification number(TIN) for safety standard certification.The TIN can be used to identify the tirein case of a recall.

I030B01E-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size (example: P195/60R15 87H)

o The "P" indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles. A"T" is the designation for a tempo-rary spare tire.

o Three-digit number (195): This num-ber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (60): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Two (or three) digit number (87):This number is the tire's load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-port.

o H: Speed Rating. The speed ratingdenotes the speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time. The ratings rangefrom "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-bol can be placed above, below orto the left or right of the Tire Iden-tification Number. It indicates thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transporta-tion Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM5


6

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Qual-ity Grading on page 8-12.

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire that has a particu-lar side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufacturer,brand and or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than the same mold-ings on the other sidewall of the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shown on thetire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire uponwhich the tire beads are seated.

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3105 meansthe 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflation pres-sure.

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM6


7

Sidewall: The portion of a tire betweenthe tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can operate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," that showacross the tread of a tire when only 2/32inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The numberof designated seating positions multi-plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the ratedcargo and luggage load.Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the carb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand dividing by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure.

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEASONand/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than all season tires an may bemore appropriate in some areas.

I040C01JM-AAT

SUMMER TIRES

Hyundai specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performanceis substantially reduced in snow andice. Summer tires do not have the tiretraction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) onthe tire side wall. If you plan to operateyour vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.Hyundai recommends the use of snowtires or all season tires on all four wheels.

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM7


8

I060A02A-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 7,500miles (12,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly between ro-tations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check the wheel nuttorque.

HEF-241!

I050A02E-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be surethat the chains are the proper size andthat they are installed in accordancewith the manufacturer's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when theyare no longer needed.

WARNING:o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than20 mph (30 km/h).

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &plastic chains.

o If you have noise caused by chainscontacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, retightenthe chains after driving 0.3 ~ 0.6miles.

I040A01S-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and havethe same load capacity as the originaltires. Snow tires should be installed onall four wheels; otherwise, poor han-dling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires onthe tire label on the driver side centerpillar outer panel, or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewallwhichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM8


9

! WARNING:o Do not use the temporary spare

tire for tire rotation.o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply

tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that could result indeath, serious injury, or propertydamage.

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperlyinflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on yourHyundai were balanced before the carwas delivered but may need balancingagain during the years you own the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-pair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

I090A01A-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

The original tires on your car have treadwear indicators. The tread wear indica-tors appear when the tread depth is 0.06in. (1.6 mm). The tire should be re-placed when these appear as a solid baracross two or more grooves of thetread. Always replace your tires withthose of the recommended size. If youchange wheels, the new wheel's rimwidth and offset must meetHyundai specification.

HXDFL248

Wear indicator

0.06 in. (1.6 mm)

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM9


10 SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from yourauthorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-fessional technicians, but is simple enough formost mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

I120A03A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAIVEHICLE

o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles LimitedWarranty.

o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Lim-ited Powertrain Warranty (original owneronly).

o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System War-

ranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty Federal

vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Lim-

ited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is providedin your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

I100A02E-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWheel nut wrench, Wrench barJack

HXD091-A

!WARNING:

o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-gerous! Worn-out tires can causeloss of braking effectiveness,steering control and traction. Whenreplacing tires, never mix radialand bias ply tires on the same car.If you replace radial tires with bias-ply tires, they must be installed insets of four.

o Using tires and wheels of otherthan the recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics that could cause death,serious injury, or property dam-age.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sdimensional specifications mayfit poorly and result in damage tothe vehicle, including brokenwheel studs.

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM10


11

I130A01A-AAT

CONSUMER INFORMATION

This consumer information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationof the U.S. Department of Transportation. Itprovides the purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-mation on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer any questionsyou may have as you read this information.

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction per-formance.

! WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

I130B04A-AAT

Tire Quality Grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal Safety Stan-dards in addition to these grades. Thesequality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM11


12

!WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-ity grades can be found on the tiresidewall between the tread shoulderand the maximum section width.For example :Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-ture A

I130D03A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-factured to meet or exceed all applicable safetystandards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge youto read and follow all directions in this Owner'sManual, particularly the information under theheadings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of your ve-hicle, please contact your nearest HyundaiMotor America Regional Office as listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hamp-shire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina,Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.

Hyundai Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Florida,Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, North Caro-lina, South Carolina, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas.

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a speci-fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM12


13

Hyundai Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, Missouri, lowa,Kansas, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Ne-braska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,Wisconsin.

Hyundai Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, Cali-fornia, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, NewMexico, Oregon, Texas, Utah, Washington,Wyoming.

Hyundai Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C01A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingHYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in in-dividual problems between you, yourdealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation, Wash-ington. D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor vehiclesafety from the Hotline.

I140A01A-AAT

Any claim or dispute you may haverelated to your vehicle's warranty or theduties contemplated under the warranty,including claims related to the refund orpartial refund of your vehicle's purchaseprice (excluding personal injury or prod-uct liability claims), shall be resolvedby binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-tion shall be administered by and throughthe National Arbitration Forum (NAF) orthe American Arbitration Association(AAA), under the Code of Procedure ofthe entity you select.You will not be responsible for payingfiling and hearing fees above $275.00.All other arbitration costs shall be borneby Hyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.

BINDING ARBITRATION

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM13


14

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallnot deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right toa jury trial.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpreted underthe Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C.sections 1-16. Judgment upon any awardmay be entered in any court havingjurisdiction.You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-tronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Af-fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address: http://warranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.Notice must be received within 90 daysafter you purchase your vehicle.

xdflhma-8.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM14

Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

99

xdflhma-9.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM1

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J040A02E-AAT

ELECTRICAL

J030A03E-AAT

TIRE

J060A01S-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01E-AAT

POWER STEERING

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.67 in. (144 mm)

Vane type

Imp.gal

12

Fuel tank

capacity

Tire

Standard

Spare

Size

P185/65 R15,P195/60 R15

T125/70(R)D15

MF60AH (12V)

90A (13.5V)

Item

Battery

Alternator

US.gal

14.5

Tire pressure

30(210)

60(420)

Liter

55

psi (kpa)

J050A01E-AAT

BRAKE

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Solid disc (With ABS)

Drum (Without ABS)

Cable

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

J010A02E-GAT

MEASUREMENT

56.1 (1425)

102.8 (2610)

58.5 (1485)

58.1 (1475)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height (unladen)

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

in. (mm)

4 Door

178.1 (4525)

67.9 (1725)

5 Door

177.9 (4520)

67.7 (1720)

xdflhma-9.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM2

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3ENGINE

SPECIFICATIONS

2.0L 4 Cylinder in-line DOHC

700 ± 100 (A/CON OFF)

750 ± 100 (A/CON ON)

0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 ~ 1.1 mm)

0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in. (0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)

0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in. (0.25 ~ 0.31 mm)

0.0047 ~ 0.011 in. (0.12 ~ 0.28 mm)

0.0079 ~ 0.015 in. (0.20 ~ 0.38 mm)

1 - 3 - 4 - 2

J070A05E-AAT

2.0 DOHC CVVT

PFR5N-11 (PLATINUM)

RC10PYP4 (PLATINUM)

BTDC 8° ± 5°

2.0 SULEV

IFR5G-11 (IRIDIUM)

-

BTDC 9° ± 5°

ITEMS

Engine Type

Idle Speed (RPM)

Spark Plug

Spark Plug Gap

Valve Clearance

(Cold engine : 20±5°C)

Ignition Timing (Base)

Firing Order

Oil Grade

NGK

CHAMPION

For adjusting

For checking

Intake

Exhaust

Intake

Exhaust

SH(API) or GF-1 (ILSAC) and ABOVE multigrade and fuel-efficient oil

xdflhma-9.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM3

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4 LUBRICATION CHART

Oil & Grease Standard

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF

SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by

Hyundai Motor Co..

PSF-3

DOT 3, DOT 4 or equivalent

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

J080A09E-AAT

Item

Engine Oil

Transaxle

Power Steering

Brake Fluid

Coolant

Manual

Auto

Q'ty

Drain and refill

With oil filter 4.2 US.QTS (3.5 lmp.qts, 4.0 liter)

2.3 US. QTS. (1.86 Imp. qts., 2.15 liter)

8.2 US. QTS. (6.8 Imp.qts., 7.8 liter)

0.95 US. QTS. (0.79 Imp.qts., 0.9 liter)

As required

6.4 US.QTS (5.31 Imp.qts., 6.0 liter)

SAE 5W-20, 5W-30

SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE 0°F(-18°C))

xdflhma-9.p65 2/5/2008, 2:17 PM4

INDEX

1010

xdflhma-10.p65 2/5/2008, 2:18 PM1

10 INDEX

2

AAir bag ...............................................................................................1-31Air Cleaner Filter ............................................................................... 6-11Air Conditioning

Care .............................................................................................. 6-17Operation ............................................................................ 1-88, 6-17Switch ........................................................................................... 1-87

Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-129Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-62Audio System

Cassete tape player operation (H240, H290) ............... 1-104, 1-118CD auto changer (H260, H290) .................................... 1-112, 1-123Compact disc player operation (H260, H290) .............. 1-109, 1-120Stereo radio operation (H240, H260, H290) ..... 1-101, 1-106, 1-115

BBattery ..................................................................................... 2-15, 6-22Binding Arbitration .............................................................................8-13Brake

Anti-lock brake system ................................................................ 2-11Checking the brakes ....................................................................6-15Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-15Pedal clearance ...........................................................................6-20Pedal freeplay ..............................................................................6-19

Breaking-In your New Hyundai .......................................................... 1-3

CCare of Cassette Tapes ................................................................ 1-127Care of Disc ................................................................................... 1-127

Catalytic Converter ............................................................................. 7-3Changing the Air Filter .......................................................................6-18Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ......................................................... 1-7Child Restraint System .....................................................................1-23

Installing a Child Restraint System with"Tether Anchorage" System .....................................................1-25

Securing the Child Restraint Seat with the "ISOFIX" System .... 1-28Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................1-61Clock ................................................................................................. 1-60Clutch

Checking fluid ............................................................................... 6-16Pedal freeplay ..............................................................................6-19

Combination LightAuto light .......................................................................................1-56Headlight flasher ..........................................................................1-56Headlight switch ...........................................................................1-55High-beam switch ........................................................................1-56Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-55Parking light auto off .....................................................................1-56Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-55

Consumer Information ...................................................................... 8-10Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-23Corrosion protection

Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ....................................... 4-2Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-3

Cruise Control ...................................................................................1-78

xdflhma-10.p65 2/5/2008, 2:18 PM2

10INDEX

3

DDefrosting / Defogging ...................................................................... 1-89Door

Locking, unlocking front door with a key ...................................... 1-5Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-63Drive Belts .........................................................................................6-20Driving

Driving for economy ..................................................................... 2-14Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-15Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-15

EEmission Control System ................................................................... 7-2Engine

Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-3Compartment ................................................................................. 6-2Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-7Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-50If the engine overheats .................................................................. 3-4Number ........................................................................................... 8-2Oil ................................................................................................... 6-4Starting ........................................................................................... 2-4

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous .................................................. 2-2

FFan Speed Control ............................................................................ 1-86Floor Mat Anchor .............................................................................. 1-73Fog Light

Front ............................................................................................. 1-57

Front SeatsAdjustable front seats ..................................................................1-11Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-13Adjusting seat forward and rearward ..........................................1-12Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-13

FuelCapacity .........................................................................................9-2Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-49Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2

Fuel Filler LidRemote release ............................................................................ 1-73

Fuses ................................................................................................6-20Fuse Panel Description .....................................................................6-34

GGeneral Checks .................................................................................. 6-3Glove Box ..........................................................................................1-68

HHazard Warning System ..................................................................1-60Headlight Aiming Adjustment ............................................................6-24Heating and Cooling Control ............................................................. 1-81Heating and Ventilation

Air flow control ..............................................................................1-82Air intake control ..........................................................................1-85Bi-level heating .............................................................................1-86Defrosting / Defogging .................................................................1-89Fan speed control (Blower control) .............................................1-86Temperature control ....................................................................1-85

xdflhma-10.p65 2/5/2008, 2:18 PM3

10 INDEX

4

High-Mounted Rear Stoplight ............................................................1-71Hood Release ....................................................................................1-72Horn ................................................................................................. 1-77

IIgnition Switch ......................................................................................2-3Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ........................................... 1-42Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) .......................................1-60

JJump Starting ......................................................................................3-3

KKey ................................................................................................... 1-3

If you lose your keys ................................................................... 3-13Positions .........................................................................................2-3

LLuggage Net ......................................................................................1-76

MMaintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............................... 5-7Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............................... 5-6Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4Service requirements ....................................................................5-2

MirrorsDay-night inside rearview mirror ................................................. 1-70Outside rear view mirror ..............................................................1-68Outside rear view mirror heater ..................................................1-70

OOdometer / Trip Odometer ...............................................................1-52

PParking Brake ....................................................................................1-62Power Outlet ......................................................................................1-61Power Steering Fluid Level ...............................................................6-23Power Window .................................................................................. 1-10

RRear Seat

Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-12Folding rear seatback and seat cushion ....................................1-15

Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................1-59Replacement of Light Blubs ..............................................................6-25Reporting Safety Defects .................................................................8-13

SSeat

Adjustable front seats ..................................................................1-11folding rear seatbacks .................................................................1-14

xdflhma-10.p65 2/5/2008, 2:18 PM4

10INDEX

5

Seat Belts3-point system .............................................................................1-20Pretensioner seat belt .................................................................. 1-29Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-21Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-19

Shop Manual ......................................................................................8-10Spark Plugs ......................................................................................... 6-9Spectacle Case ................................................................................. 1-67Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-50Starting Procedure .............................................................................. 2-5Steering Wheel Freeplay .................................................................. 6-19Steering Wheel Tilt Lever .................................................................. 1-77Stereo Sound System .......................................................................1-99Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-64Sun visor ........................................................................................... 1-71

TTachometer ....................................................................................... 1-49Tail Gate (5Door) .............................................................................. 1-76Theft-Alarm System ............................................................................ 1-8Tires

All season tires ............................................................................... 8-7Balancing ........................................................................................ 8-9Chains ............................................................................................ 8-8Changing a flat tire ......................................................................... 3-6If you have a flat tire ....................................................................... 3-6Information ...................................................................................... 8-2Pressure ......................................................................................... 8-3Replacement .................................................................................. 8-9

Rotation .......................................................................................... 8-8Snow tires ....................................................................................... 8-8Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-5Summer tires .................................................................................. 8-7Tire sidewall labeling ...................................................................... 8-5Traction .......................................................................................... 8-9

TowingA trailer (or vehicle) ...................................................................... 2-17Emergency ...................................................................................3-13If your car must be towed ............................................................3-11

Traction Control System ................................................................... 2-11Transaxle

Automatic ........................................................................................ 2-7Automatic transaxle fluid checking .............................................. 6-14Manual ............................................................................................2-5Manual transaxle fluid checking ..................................................6-13

VVehicle Identification Number ............................................................. 8-2Vehicle Specifications

Engine ............................................................................................. 9-3Lubrication chart ............................................................................ 9-4Measurement ................................................................................. 9-2

WWarning Lights and Indicator Lights ................................................. 1-46Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................................... 1-57Windshield Wiper Blades ..................................................................6-11

xdflhma-10.p65 2/5/2008, 2:18 PM5

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail Purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

xdflhma-0.p65 2/5/2008, 1:59 PM2

Seoul Korea

Printing: MAR. 14, 2005Publication No.: A2DO-EU53KPrinted in Korea

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION FUEL:UNLEADED gasoline onlyPump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITYOriginal, US.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 14.5 (12, 55)

TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-2 through 8-10

HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuelefficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperaturesare above 0°F (-18°C). For other viscosity recommendations, see page 6-4 or 9-4.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) Oil levelshould be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the selector leverthrough all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Then check thelevel of fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP IIIspecification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

QUICK INDEXo Car will not start ....................................................................... 3-2o Flat tire ..................................................................................... 3-6o Warning light/chime comes on ................................... 1-46 ~ 1-49o Engine overheats ...................................................................... 3-4o Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3-11o Starting the engine ................................................................... 2-4o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) .......................... 1-3o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................ 5-4o Reporting safety defects ......................................................... 8-13

xdflhma-11.p65 3/15/2005, 1:34 PM2

Documents

Manual 2005 Elantra